Merge branches 'release', 'acpica', 'bugzilla-10224', 'bugzilla-9772', 'bugzilla-9916', 'ec', 'eeepc', 'idle', 'misc', 'pm-legacy', 'sysfs-links-2.6.26', 'thermal', 'thinkpad' and 'video' into release

.gitignore

@@ -27,6 +27,7 @@ TAGS
 vmlinux*
 !vmlinux.lds.S
 System.map
+Module.markers
 Module.symvers
 !.gitignore
 

CREDITS

@@ -403,6 +403,8 @@ D: Linux CD and Support Giveaway List
 N: Erik Inge Bolsø
 E: knan@mo.himolde.no
 D: Misc kernel hacks
+D: Updated PC speaker driver for 2.3
+S: Norway
 
 N: Andreas E. Bombe
 E: andreas.bombe@munich.netsurf.de
@@ -3116,6 +3118,12 @@ S: Post Office Box 64132
 S: Sunnyvale, California 94088-4132
 S: USA
 
+N: Stas Sergeev
+E: stsp@users.sourceforge.net
+D: PCM PC-Speaker driver
+D: misc fixes
+S: Russia
+
 N: Simon Shapiro
 E: shimon@i-Connect.Net
 W: http://www.-i-Connect.Net/~shimon

Documentation/00-INDEX

@@ -25,8 +25,6 @@ DMA-API.txt
 	- DMA API, pci_ API & extensions for non-consistent memory machines.
 DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
 	- How to do DMA with ISA (and LPC) devices.
-DMA-mapping.txt
-	- info for PCI drivers using DMA portably across all platforms.
 DocBook/
 	- directory with DocBook templates etc. for kernel documentation.
 HOWTO
@@ -43,8 +41,6 @@ ManagementStyle
 	- how to (attempt to) manage kernel hackers.
 MSI-HOWTO.txt
 	- the Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) Driver Guide HOWTO and FAQ.
-PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt
-	- a guide describing the PCI Express Port Bus driver.
 RCU/
 	- directory with info on RCU (read-copy update).
 README.DAC960
@@ -167,10 +163,8 @@ highuid.txt
 	- notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs.
 hpet.txt
 	- High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux.
-hrtimer/
-	- info on the timer_stats debugging facility for timer (ab)use.
-hrtimers/
-	- info on the hrtimers subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers.
+timers/
+	- info on the timer related topics
 hw_random.txt
 	- info on Linux support for random number generator in i8xx chipsets.
 hwmon/
@@ -287,12 +281,6 @@ parport.txt
 	- how to use the parallel-port driver.
 parport-lowlevel.txt
 	- description and usage of the low level parallel port functions.
-pci-error-recovery.txt
-	- info on PCI error recovery.
-pci.txt
-	- info on the PCI subsystem for device driver authors.
-pcieaer-howto.txt
-	- the PCI Express Advanced Error Reporting Driver Guide HOWTO.
 pcmcia/
 	- info on the Linux PCMCIA driver.
 pi-futex.txt
@@ -341,8 +329,6 @@ sgi-visws.txt
 	- short blurb on the SGI Visual Workstations.
 sh/
 	- directory with info on porting Linux to a new architecture.
-smart-config.txt
-	- description of the Smart Config makefile feature.
 sound/
 	- directory with info on sound card support.
 sparc/

Documentation/ABI/obsolete/o2cb

@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+What:		/sys/o2cb symlink
+Date:		Dec 2005
+KernelVersion:	2.6.16
+Contact:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+Description:	This is a symlink: /sys/o2cb to /sys/fs/o2cb. The symlink will
+		be removed when new versions of ocfs2-tools which know to look
+		in /sys/fs/o2cb are sufficiently prevalent. Don't code new
+		software to look here, it should try /sys/fs/o2cb instead.
+		See Documentation/ABI/stable/o2cb for more information on usage.
+Users:		ocfs2-tools. It's sufficient to mail proposed changes to
+		ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com.

Documentation/ABI/stable/o2cb

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+What:		/sys/fs/o2cb/ (was /sys/o2cb)
+Date:		Dec 2005
+KernelVersion:	2.6.16
+Contact:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+Description:	Ocfs2-tools looks at 'interface-revision' for versioning
+		information. Each logmask/ file controls a set of debug prints
+		and can be written into with the strings "allow", "deny", or
+		"off". Reading the file returns the current state.
+Users:		ocfs2-tools. It's sufficient to mail proposed changes to
+		ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com.

Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-ubi

@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		The ubi/ class sub-directory belongs to the UBI subsystem and
+		provides general UBI information, per-UBI device information
+		and per-UBI volume information.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/version
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		This file contains version of the latest supported UBI on-media
+		format. Currently it is 1, and there is no plan to change this.
+		However, if in the future UBI needs on-flash format changes
+		which cannot be done in a compatible manner, a new format
+		version will be added. So this is a mechanism for possible
+		future backward-compatible (but forward-incompatible)
+		improvements.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubiX/
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/ubi0, /sys/class/ubi1, etc directories describe
+		UBI devices (UBI device 0, 1, etc). They contain general UBI
+		device information and per UBI volume information (each UBI
+		device may have many UBI volumes)
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/avail_eraseblocks
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Amount of available logical eraseblock. For example, one may
+		create a new UBI volume which has this amount of logical
+		eraseblocks.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/bad_peb_count
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Count of bad physical eraseblocks on the underlying MTD device.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/bgt_enabled
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Contains ASCII "0\n" if the UBI background thread is disabled,
+		and ASCII "1\n" if it is enabled.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/dev
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Major and minor numbers of the character device corresponding
+		to this UBI device (in <major>:<minor> format).
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/eraseblock_size
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Maximum logical eraseblock size this UBI device may provide. UBI
+		volumes may have smaller logical eraseblock size because of their
+		alignment.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/max_ec
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Maximum physical eraseblock erase counter value.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/max_vol_count
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Maximum number of volumes which this UBI device may have.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/min_io_size
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Minimum input/output unit size. All the I/O may only be done
+		in fractions of the contained number.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/mtd_num
+Date:		January 2008
+KernelVersion:	2.6.25
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Number of the underlying MTD device.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/reserved_for_bad
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Number of physical eraseblocks reserved for bad block handling.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/total_eraseblocks
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Total number of good (not marked as bad) physical eraseblocks on
+		the underlying MTD device.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/volumes_count
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Count of volumes on this UBI device.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_0/, /sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_1/,
+		etc directories describe UBI volumes on UBI device X (volumes
+		0, 1, etc).
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/alignment
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Volume alignment - the value the logical eraseblock size of
+		this volume has to be aligned on. For example, 2048 means that
+		logical eraseblock size is multiple of 2048. In other words,
+		volume logical eraseblock size is UBI device logical eraseblock
+		size aligned to the alignment value.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/corrupted
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Contains ASCII "0\n" if the UBI volume is OK, and ASCII "1\n"
+		if it is corrupted (e.g., due to an interrupted volume update).
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/data_bytes
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		The amount of data this volume contains. This value makes sense
+		only for static volumes, and for dynamic volume it equivalent
+		to the total volume size in bytes.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/dev
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Major and minor numbers of the character device corresponding
+		to this UBI volume (in <major>:<minor> format).
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/name
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Volume name.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/reserved_ebs
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Count of physical eraseblock reserved for this volume.
+		Equivalent to the volume size in logical eraseblocks.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/type
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Volume type. Contains ASCII "dynamic\n" for dynamic volumes and
+		"static\n" for static volumes.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/upd_marker
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Contains ASCII "0\n" if the update marker is not set for this
+		volume, and "1\n" if it is set. The update marker is set when
+		volume update starts, and cleaned when it ends. So the presence
+		of the update marker indicates that the volume is being updated
+		at the moment of the update was interrupted. The later may be
+		checked using the "corrupted" sysfs file.
+
+What:		/sys/class/ubi/ubiX/ubiX_Y/usable_eb_size
+Date:		July 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Contact:	Artem Bityutskiy <dedekind@infradead.org>
+Description:
+		Logical eraseblock size of this volume. Equivalent to logical
+		eraseblock size of the device aligned on the volume alignment
+		value.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci

@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../vpd
+Date:		February 2008
+Contact:	Ben Hutchings <bhutchings@solarflare.com>
+Description:
+		A file named vpd in a device directory will be a
+		binary file containing the Vital Product Data for the
+		device.  It should follow the VPD format defined in
+		PCI Specification 2.1 or 2.2, but users should consider
+		that some devices may have malformatted data.  If the
+		underlying VPD has a writable section then the
+		corresponding section of this file will be writable.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ibft

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+What:		/sys/firmware/ibft/initiator
+Date:		November 2007
+Contact:	Konrad Rzeszutek <ketuzsezr@darnok.org>
+Description:	The /sys/firmware/ibft/initiator directory will contain
+		files that expose the iSCSI Boot Firmware Table initiator data.
+		Usually this contains the Initiator name.
+
+What:		/sys/firmware/ibft/targetX
+Date:		November 2007
+Contact:	Konrad Rzeszutek <ketuzsezr@darnok.org>
+Description:	The /sys/firmware/ibft/targetX directory will contain
+		files that expose the iSCSI Boot Firmware Table target data.
+		Usually this contains the target's IP address, boot LUN,
+		target name, and what NIC it is associated with. It can also
+		contain the CHAP name (and password), the reverse CHAP
+		name (and password)
+
+What:		/sys/firmware/ibft/ethernetX
+Date:		November 2007
+Contact:	Konrad Rzeszutek <ketuzsezr@darnok.org>
+Description:	The /sys/firmware/ibft/ethernetX directory will contain
+		files that expose the iSCSI Boot Firmware Table NIC data.
+		This can this can the IP address, MAC, and gateway of the NIC.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ocfs2

@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+What:		/sys/fs/ocfs2/
+Date:		April 2008
+Contact:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+Description:
+		The /sys/fs/ocfs2 directory contains knobs used by the
+		ocfs2-tools to interact with the filesystem.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/ocfs2/max_locking_protocol
+Date:		April 2008
+Contact:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+Description:
+		The /sys/fs/ocfs2/max_locking_protocol file displays version
+		of ocfs2 locking supported by the filesystem.  This version
+		covers how ocfs2 uses distributed locking between cluster
+		nodes.
+
+		The protocol version has a major and minor number.  Two
+		cluster nodes can interoperate if they have an identical
+		major number and an overlapping minor number - thus,
+		a node with version 1.10 can interoperate with a node
+		sporting version 1.8, as long as both use the 1.8 protocol.
+
+		Reading from this file returns a single line, the major
+		number and minor number joined by a period, eg "1.10".
+
+		This file is read-only.  The value is compiled into the
+		driver.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/ocfs2/loaded_cluster_plugins
+Date:		April 2008
+Contact:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+Description:
+		The /sys/fs/ocfs2/loaded_cluster_plugins file describes
+		the available plugins to support ocfs2 cluster operation.
+		A cluster plugin is required to use ocfs2 in a cluster.
+		There are currently two available plugins:
+
+		* 'o2cb' - The classic o2cb cluster stack that ocfs2 has
+			used since its inception.
+		* 'user' - A plugin supporting userspace cluster software
+			in conjunction with fs/dlm.
+
+		Reading from this file returns the names of all loaded
+		plugins, one per line.
+
+		This file is read-only.  Its contents may change as
+		plugins are loaded or removed.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/ocfs2/active_cluster_plugin
+Date:		April 2008
+Contact:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+Description:
+		The /sys/fs/ocfs2/active_cluster_plugin displays which
+		cluster plugin is currently in use by the filesystem.
+		The active plugin will appear in the loaded_cluster_plugins
+		file as well.  Only one plugin can be used at a time.
+
+		Reading from this file returns the name of the active plugin
+		on a single line.
+
+		This file is read-only.  Which plugin is active depends on
+		the cluster stack in use.  The contents may change
+		when all filesystems are unmounted and the cluster stack
+		is changed.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/ocfs2/cluster_stack
+Date:		April 2008
+Contact:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+Description:
+		The /sys/fs/ocfs2/cluster_stack file contains the name
+		of current ocfs2 cluster stack.  This value is set by
+		userspace tools when bringing the cluster stack online.
+
+		Cluster stack names are 4 characters in length.
+
+		When the 'o2cb' cluster stack is used, the 'o2cb' cluster
+		plugin is active.  All other cluster stacks use the 'user'
+		cluster plugin.
+
+		Reading from this file returns the name of the current
+		cluster stack on a single line.
+
+		Writing a new stack name to this file changes the current
+		cluster stack unless there are mounted ocfs2 filesystems.
+		If there are mounted filesystems, attempts to change the
+		stack return an error.
+
+Users:
+	ocfs2-tools <ocfs2-tools-devel@oss.oracle.com>

Documentation/DocBook/Makefile

@@ -9,9 +9,10 @@
 DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
 	    kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
 	    procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \
-	    kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml \
+	    kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
 	    gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
-	    genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml
+	    genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
+	    mac80211.xml
 
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):
@@ -186,8 +187,11 @@ quiet_cmd_fig2png = FIG2PNG $@
 
 ###
 # Rule to convert a .c file to inline XML documentation
+       gen_xml = :
+ quiet_gen_xml = echo '  GEN     $@'
+silent_gen_xml = :
 %.xml: %.c
-	@echo '  GEN     $@'
+	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(                            \
 	   echo "<programlisting>";   \
 	   expand --tabs=8 < $< |     \

Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl

@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
 !Elib/string.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>Bit Operations</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-x86/bitops_32.h
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/bitops.h
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
@@ -297,11 +297,6 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c
 !Ikernel/acct.c
   </chapter>
 
-  <chapter id="pmfuncs">
-     <title>Power Management</title>
-!Ekernel/power/pm.c
-  </chapter>
-
   <chapter id="devdrivers">
      <title>Device drivers infrastructure</title>
      <sect1><title>Device Drivers Base</title>
@@ -650,4 +645,58 @@ X!Idrivers/video/console/fonts.c
 !Edrivers/i2c/i2c-core.c
   </chapter>
 
+  <chapter id="clk">
+     <title>Clock Framework</title>
+
+     <para>
+	The clock framework defines programming interfaces to support
+	software management of the system clock tree.
+	This framework is widely used with System-On-Chip (SOC) platforms
+	to support power management and various devices which may need
+	custom clock rates.
+	Note that these "clocks" don't relate to timekeeping or real
+	time clocks (RTCs), each of which have separate frameworks.
+	These <structname>struct clk</structname> instances may be used
+	to manage for example a 96 MHz signal that is used to shift bits
+	into and out of peripherals or busses, or otherwise trigger
+	synchronous state machine transitions in system hardware.
+     </para>
+
+     <para>
+	Power management is supported by explicit software clock gating:
+	unused clocks are disabled, so the system doesn't waste power
+	changing the state of transistors that aren't in active use.
+	On some systems this may be backed by hardware clock gating,
+	where clocks are gated without being disabled in software.
+	Sections of chips that are powered but not clocked may be able
+	to retain their last state.
+	This low power state is often called a <emphasis>retention
+	mode</emphasis>.
+	This mode still incurs leakage currents, especially with finer
+	circuit geometries, but for CMOS circuits power is mostly used
+	by clocked state changes.
+     </para>
+
+     <para>
+	Power-aware drivers only enable their clocks when the device
+	they manage is in active use.  Also, system sleep states often
+	differ according to which clock domains are active:  while a
+	"standby" state may allow wakeup from several active domains, a
+	"mem" (suspend-to-RAM) state may require a more wholesale shutdown
+	of clocks derived from higher speed PLLs and oscillators, limiting
+	the number of possible wakeup event sources.  A driver's suspend
+	method may need to be aware of system-specific clock constraints
+	on the target sleep state.
+     </para>
+
+     <para>
+        Some platforms support programmable clock generators.  These
+	can be used by external chips of various kinds, such as other
+	CPUs, multimedia codecs, and devices with strict requirements
+	for interface clocking.
+     </para>
+
+!Iinclude/linux/clk.h
+  </chapter>
+
 </book>

Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl

@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@
    </para>
    <para>
      The third type is a semaphore
-     (<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/semaphore.h</filename>): it
+     (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/semaphore.h</filename>): it
      can have more than one holder at any time (the number decided at
      initialization time), although it is most commonly used as a
      single-holder lock (a mutex).  If you can't get a semaphore, your
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@
      <para>
        If you have a data structure which is only ever accessed from
        user context, then you can use a simple semaphore
-       (<filename>linux/asm/semaphore.h</filename>) to protect it.  This 
+       (<filename>linux/linux/semaphore.h</filename>) to protect it.  This
        is the most trivial case: you initialize the semaphore to the number 
        of resources available (usually 1), and call
        <function>down_interruptible()</function> to grab the semaphore, and 
@@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ The change is shown below, in standard patch format: the
  };
 
 -static DEFINE_MUTEX(cache_lock);
-+static spinlock_t cache_lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED;
++static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(cache_lock);
  static LIST_HEAD(cache);
  static unsigned int cache_num = 0;
  #define MAX_CACHE_SIZE 10
@@ -1238,7 +1238,7 @@ Here is the "lock-per-object" implementation:
 -        int popularity;
  };
 
- static spinlock_t cache_lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED;
+ static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(cache_lock);
 @@ -77,6 +84,7 @@
          obj-&gt;id = id;
          obj-&gt;popularity = 0;
@@ -1656,7 +1656,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
  #include &lt;linux/slab.h&gt;
  #include &lt;linux/string.h&gt;
 +#include &lt;linux/rcupdate.h&gt;
- #include &lt;asm/semaphore.h&gt;
+ #include &lt;linux/semaphore.h&gt;
  #include &lt;asm/errno.h&gt;
 
  struct object

Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl

@@ -0,0 +1,447 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="kgdbOnLinux">
+ <bookinfo>
+  <title>Using kgdb and the kgdb Internals</title>
+
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Jason</firstname>
+    <surname>Wessel</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Tom</firstname>
+    <surname>Rini</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>trini@kernel.crashing.org</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Amit S.</firstname>
+    <surname>Kale</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>amitkale@linsyssoft.com</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2008</year>
+   <holder>Wind River Systems, Inc.</holder>
+  </copyright>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2004-2005</year>
+   <holder>MontaVista Software, Inc.</holder>
+  </copyright>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2004</year>
+   <holder>Amit S. Kale</holder>
+  </copyright>
+
+  <legalnotice>
+   <para>
+   This file is licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+   version 2. This program is licensed "as is" without any warranty of any
+   kind, whether express or implied.
+   </para>
+
+  </legalnotice>
+ </bookinfo>
+
+<toc></toc>
+  <chapter id="Introduction">
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+    <para>
+    kgdb is a source level debugger for linux kernel. It is used along
+    with gdb to debug a linux kernel.  The expectation is that gdb can
+    be used to "break in" to the kernel to inspect memory, variables
+    and look through a cal stack information similar to what an
+    application developer would use gdb for.  It is possible to place
+    breakpoints in kernel code and perform some limited execution
+    stepping.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    Two machines are required for using kgdb. One of these machines is a
+    development machine and the other is a test machine.  The kernel
+    to be debugged runs on the test machine. The development machine
+    runs an instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which contains
+    the symbols (not boot image such as bzImage, zImage, uImage...).
+    In gdb the developer specifies the connection parameters and
+    connects to kgdb.  Depending on which kgdb I/O modules exist in
+    the kernel for a given architecture, it may be possible to debug
+    the test machine's kernel with the development machine using a
+    rs232 or ethernet connection.
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="CompilingAKernel">
+    <title>Compiling a kernel</title>
+    <para>
+    To enable <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB</symbol>, look under the "Kernel debugging"
+    and then select "KGDB: kernel debugging with remote gdb".
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging
+    host and debugged target.  Early boot debugging requires a KGDB
+    I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be
+    built into the kernel directly. Kgdb I/O driver configuration
+    takes place via kernel or module parameters, see following
+    chapter.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    The kgdb test compile options are described in the kgdb test suite chapter.
+    </para>
+
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="EnableKGDB">
+   <title>Enable kgdb for debugging</title>
+   <para>
+   In order to use kgdb you must activate it by passing configuration
+   information to one of the kgdb I/O drivers.  If you do not pass any
+   configuration information kgdb will not do anything at all.  Kgdb
+   will only actively hook up to the kernel trap hooks if a kgdb I/O
+   driver is loaded and configured.  If you unconfigure a kgdb I/O
+   driver, kgdb will unregister all the kernel hook points.
+   </para>
+   <para>
+   All drivers can be reconfigured at run time, if
+   <symbol>CONFIG_SYSFS</symbol> and <symbol>CONFIG_MODULES</symbol>
+   are enabled, by echo'ing a new config string to
+   <constant>/sys/module/&lt;driver&gt;/parameter/&lt;option&gt;</constant>.
+   The driver can be unconfigured by passing an empty string.  You cannot
+   change the configuration while the debugger is attached.  Make sure
+   to detach the debugger with the <constant>detach</constant> command
+   prior to trying unconfigure a kgdb I/O driver.
+   </para>
+   <sect1 id="kgdbwait">
+   <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbwait</title>
+   <para>
+   The Kernel command line option <constant>kgdbwait</constant> makes
+   kgdb wait for a debugger connection during booting of a kernel.  You
+   can only use this option you compiled a kgdb I/O driver into the
+   kernel and you specified the I/O driver configuration as a kernel
+   command line option.  The kgdbwait parameter should always follow the
+   configuration parameter for the kgdb I/O driver in the kernel
+   command line else the I/O driver will not be configured prior to
+   asking the kernel to use it to wait.
+   </para>
+   <para>
+   The kernel will stop and wait as early as the I/O driver and
+   architecture will allow when you use this option.  If you build the
+   kgdb I/O driver as a kernel module kgdbwait will not do anything.
+   </para>
+   </sect1>
+  <sect1 id="kgdboc">
+  <title>Kernel parameter: kgdboc</title>
+  <para>
+  The kgdboc driver was originally an abbreviation meant to stand for
+  "kgdb over console".  Kgdboc is designed to work with a single
+  serial port. It was meant to cover the circumstance
+  where you wanted to use a serial console as your primary console as
+  well as using it to perform kernel debugging.  Of course you can
+  also use kgdboc without assigning a console to the same port.
+  </para>
+  <sect2 id="UsingKgdboc">
+  <title>Using kgdboc</title>
+  <para>
+  You can configure kgdboc via sysfs or a module or kernel boot line
+  parameter depending on if you build with CONFIG_KGDBOC as a module
+  or built-in.
+  <orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>From the module load or build-in</para>
+  <para><constant>kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para>
+  <para>
+  The example here would be if your console port was typically ttyS0, you would use something like <constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant> or on the ARM Versatile AB you would likely use <constant>kgdboc=ttyAMA0,115200</constant>
+  </para>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>From sysfs</para>
+  <para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  </para>
+  <para>
+  NOTE: Kgdboc does not support interrupting the target via the
+  gdb remote protocol.  You must manually send a sysrq-g unless you
+  have a proxy that splits console output to a terminal problem and
+  has a separate port for the debugger to connect to that sends the
+  sysrq-g for you.
+  </para>
+  <para>When using kgdboc with no debugger proxy, you can end up
+  connecting the debugger for one of two entry points.  If an
+  exception occurs after you have loaded kgdboc a message should print
+  on the console stating it is waiting for the debugger.  In case you
+  disconnect your terminal program and then connect the debugger in
+  its place.  If you want to interrupt the target system and forcibly
+  enter a debug session you have to issue a Sysrq sequence and then
+  type the letter <constant>g</constant>.  Then you disconnect the
+  terminal session and connect gdb.  Your options if you don't like
+  this are to hack gdb to send the sysrq-g for you as well as on the
+  initial connect, or to use a debugger proxy that allows an
+  unmodified gdb to do the debugging.
+  </para>
+  </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1 id="kgdbcon">
+  <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbcon</title>
+  <para>
+  Kgdb supports using the gdb serial protocol to send console messages
+  to the debugger when the debugger is connected and running.  There
+  are two ways to activate this feature.
+  <orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>Activate with the kernel command line option:</para>
+  <para><constant>kgdbcon</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Use sysfs before configuring an io driver</para>
+  <para>
+  <constant>echo 1 &gt; /sys/module/kgdb/parameters/kgdb_use_con</constant>
+  </para>
+  <para>
+  NOTE: If you do this after you configure the kgdb I/O driver, the
+  setting will not take effect until the next point the I/O is
+  reconfigured.
+  </para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  </para>
+  <para>
+  IMPORTANT NOTE: Using this option with kgdb over the console
+  (kgdboc) or kgdb over ethernet (kgdboe) is not supported.
+  </para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="ConnectingGDB">
+  <title>Connecting gdb</title>
+    <para>
+    If you are using kgdboc, you need to have used kgdbwait as a boot
+    argument, issued a sysrq-g, or the system you are going to debug
+    has already taken an exception and is waiting for the debugger to
+    attach before you can connect gdb.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    If you are not using different kgdb I/O driver other than kgdboc,
+    you should be able to connect and the target will automatically
+    respond.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    Example (using a serial port):
+    </para>
+    <programlisting>
+    % gdb ./vmlinux
+    (gdb) set remotebaud 115200
+    (gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0
+    </programlisting>
+    <para>
+    Example (kgdb to a terminal server):
+    </para>
+    <programlisting>
+    % gdb ./vmlinux
+    (gdb) target remote udp:192.168.2.2:6443
+    </programlisting>
+    <para>
+    Example (kgdb over ethernet):
+    </para>
+    <programlisting>
+    % gdb ./vmlinux
+    (gdb) target remote udp:192.168.2.2:6443
+    </programlisting>
+    <para>
+    Once connected, you can debug a kernel the way you would debug an
+    application program.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    If you are having problems connecting or something is going
+    seriously wrong while debugging, it will most often be the case
+    that you want to enable gdb to be verbose about its target
+    communications.  You do this prior to issuing the <constant>target
+    remote</constant> command by typing in: <constant>set remote debug 1</constant>
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="KGDBTestSuite">
+    <title>kgdb Test Suite</title>
+    <para>
+    When kgdb is enabled in the kernel config you can also elect to
+    enable the config parameter KGDB_TESTS.  Turning this on will
+    enable a special kgdb I/O module which is designed to test the
+    kgdb internal functions.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    The kgdb tests are mainly intended for developers to test the kgdb
+    internals as well as a tool for developing a new kgdb architecture
+    specific implementation.  These tests are not really for end users
+    of the Linux kernel.  The primary source of documentation would be
+    to look in the drivers/misc/kgdbts.c file.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    The kgdb test suite can also be configured at compile time to run
+    the core set of tests by setting the kernel config parameter
+    KGDB_TESTS_ON_BOOT.  This particular option is aimed at automated
+    regression testing and does not require modifying the kernel boot
+    config arguments.  If this is turned on, the kgdb test suite can
+    be disabled by specifying "kgdbts=" as a kernel boot argument.
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="CommonBackEndReq">
+  <title>KGDB Internals</title>
+  <sect1 id="kgdbArchitecture">
+    <title>Architecture Specifics</title>
+      <para>
+      Kgdb is organized into three basic components:
+      <orderedlist>
+      <listitem><para>kgdb core</para>
+      <para>
+      The kgdb core is found in kernel/kgdb.c.  It contains:
+      <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem><para>All the logic to implement the gdb serial protocol</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>A generic OS exception handler which includes sync'ing the processors into a stopped state on an multi cpu system.</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>The API to talk to the kgdb I/O drivers</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>The API to make calls to the arch specific kgdb implementation</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>The logic to perform safe memory reads and writes to memory while using the debugger</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>A full implementation for software breakpoints unless overridden by the arch</para></listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      </para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem><para>kgdb arch specific implementation</para>
+      <para>
+      This implementation is generally found in arch/*/kernel/kgdb.c.
+      As an example, arch/x86/kernel/kgdb.c contains the specifics to
+      implement HW breakpoint as well as the initialization to
+      dynamically register and unregister for the trap handlers on
+      this architecture.  The arch specific portion implements:
+      <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem><para>contains an arch specific trap catcher which
+      invokes kgdb_handle_exception() to start kgdb about doing its
+      work</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>translation to and from gdb specific packet format to pt_regs</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>Registration and unregistration of architecture specific trap hooks</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>Any special exception handling and cleanup</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>NMI exception handling and cleanup</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>(optional)HW breakpoints</para></listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      </para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem><para>kgdb I/O driver</para>
+      <para>
+      Each kgdb I/O driver has to provide an implemenation for the following:
+      <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem><para>configuration via builtin or module</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>dynamic configuration and kgdb hook registration calls</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>read and write character interface</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>A cleanup handler for unconfiguring from the kgdb core</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>(optional) Early debug methodology</para></listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      Any given kgdb I/O driver has to operate very closely with the
+      hardware and must do it in such a way that does not enable
+      interrupts or change other parts of the system context without
+      completely restoring them. The kgdb core will repeatedly "poll"
+      a kgdb I/O driver for characters when it needs input.  The I/O
+      driver is expected to return immediately if there is no data
+      available.  Doing so allows for the future possibility to touch
+      watch dog hardware in such a way as to have a target system not
+      reset when these are enabled.
+      </para>
+      </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+      </para>
+      <para>
+      If you are intent on adding kgdb architecture specific support
+      for a new architecture, the architecture should define
+      <constant>HAVE_ARCH_KGDB</constant> in the architecture specific
+      Kconfig file.  This will enable kgdb for the architecture, and
+      at that point you must create an architecture specific kgdb
+      implementation.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+      There are a few flags which must be set on every architecture in
+      their &lt;asm/kgdb.h&gt; file.  These are:
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>
+	  NUMREGBYTES: The size in bytes of all of the registers, so
+	  that we can ensure they will all fit into a packet.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	  BUFMAX: The size in bytes of the buffer GDB will read into.
+	  This must be larger than NUMREGBYTES.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	  CACHE_FLUSH_IS_SAFE: Set to 1 if it is always safe to call
+	  flush_cache_range or flush_icache_range.  On some architectures,
+	  these functions may not be safe to call on SMP since we keep other
+	  CPUs in a holding pattern.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      </para>
+      <para>
+      There are also the following functions for the common backend,
+      found in kernel/kgdb.c, that must be supplied by the
+      architecture-specific backend unless marked as (optional), in
+      which case a default function maybe used if the architecture
+      does not need to provide a specific implementation.
+      </para>
+!Iinclude/linux/kgdb.h
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1 id="kgdbocDesign">
+  <title>kgdboc internals</title>
+  <para>
+  The kgdboc driver is actually a very thin driver that relies on the
+  underlying low level to the hardware driver having "polling hooks"
+  which the to which the tty driver is attached.  In the initial
+  implementation of kgdboc it the serial_core was changed to expose a
+  low level uart hook for doing polled mode reading and writing of a
+  single character while in an atomic context.  When kgdb makes an I/O
+  request to the debugger, kgdboc invokes a call back in the serial
+  core which in turn uses the call back in the uart driver.  It is
+  certainly possible to extend kgdboc to work with non-uart based
+  consoles in the future.
+  </para>
+  <para>
+  When using kgdboc with a uart, the uart driver must implement two callbacks in the <constant>struct uart_ops</constant>. Example from drivers/8250.c:<programlisting>
+#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL
+	.poll_get_char = serial8250_get_poll_char,
+	.poll_put_char = serial8250_put_poll_char,
+#endif
+  </programlisting>
+  Any implementation specifics around creating a polling driver use the
+  <constant>#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL</constant>, as shown above.
+  Keep in mind that polling hooks have to be implemented in such a way
+  that they can be called from an atomic context and have to restore
+  the state of the uart chip on return such that the system can return
+  to normal when the debugger detaches.  You need to be very careful
+  with any kind of lock you consider, because failing here is most
+  going to mean pressing the reset button.
+  </para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="credits">
+     <title>Credits</title>
+	<para>
+		The following people have contributed to this document:
+		<orderedlist>
+			<listitem><para>Amit Kale<email>amitkale@linsyssoft.com</email></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para>Tom Rini<email>trini@kernel.crashing.org</email></para></listitem>
+		</orderedlist>
+                In March 2008 this document was completely rewritten by:
+		<itemizedlist>
+		<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</para>
+  </chapter>
+</book>
+

Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl

@@ -0,0 +1,335 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="mac80211-developers-guide">
+  <bookinfo>
+    <title>The mac80211 subsystem for kernel developers</title>
+
+    <authorgroup>
+      <author>
+        <firstname>Johannes</firstname>
+        <surname>Berg</surname>
+        <affiliation>
+          <address><email>johannes@sipsolutions.net</email></address>
+        </affiliation>
+      </author>
+    </authorgroup>
+
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2007</year>
+      <year>2008</year>
+      <holder>Johannes Berg</holder>
+    </copyright>
+
+    <legalnotice>
+      <para>
+        This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
+        it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+        License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
+      </para>
+
+      <para>
+        This documentation is distributed in the hope that it will be
+        useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+        warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+        See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+      </para>
+
+      <para>
+        You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+        License along with this documentation; if not, write to the Free
+        Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
+        MA 02111-1307 USA
+      </para>
+
+      <para>
+        For more details see the file COPYING in the source
+        distribution of Linux.
+      </para>
+    </legalnotice>
+
+    <abstract>
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Introduction
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Warning
+    </abstract>
+  </bookinfo>
+
+  <toc></toc>
+
+<!--
+Generally, this document shall be ordered by increasing complexity.
+It is important to note that readers should be able to read only
+the first few sections to get a working driver and only advanced
+usage should require reading the full document.
+-->
+
+  <part>
+    <title>The basic mac80211 driver interface</title>
+    <partintro>
+      <para>
+        You should read and understand the information contained
+        within this part of the book while implementing a driver.
+        In some chapters, advanced usage is noted, that may be
+        skipped at first.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        This part of the book only covers station and monitor mode
+        functionality, additional information required to implement
+        the other modes is covered in the second part of the book.
+      </para>
+    </partintro>
+
+    <chapter id="basics">
+      <title>Basic hardware handling</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>
+        This chapter shall contain information on getting a hw
+        struct allocated and registered with mac80211.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Since it is required to allocate rates/modes before registering
+        a hw struct, this chapter shall also contain information on setting
+        up the rate/mode structs.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Additionally, some discussion about the callbacks and
+        the general programming model should be in here, including
+        the definition of ieee80211_ops which will be referred to
+        a lot.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Finally, a discussion of hardware capabilities should be done
+        with references to other parts of the book.
+      </para>
+<!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order -->
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_DEV
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ops
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_alloc_hw
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_register_hw
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tx_led_name
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_rx_led_name
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_radio_led_name
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_unregister_hw
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_free_hw
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="phy-handling">
+      <title>PHY configuration</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>
+        This chapter should describe PHY handling including
+        start/stop callbacks and the various structures used.
+      </para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf_flags
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="iface-handling">
+      <title>Virtual interfaces</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>
+        This chapter should describe virtual interface basics
+        that are relevant to the driver (VLANs, MGMT etc are not.)
+        It should explain the use of the add_iface/remove_iface
+        callbacks as well as the interface configuration callbacks.
+      </para>
+      <para>Things related to AP mode should be discussed there.</para>
+      <para>
+        Things related to supporting multiple interfaces should be
+        in the appropriate chapter, a BIG FAT note should be here about
+        this though and the recommendation to allow only a single
+        interface in STA mode at first!
+      </para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_types
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_init_conf
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_conf
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="rx-tx">
+      <title>Receive and transmit processing</title>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>what should be here</title>
+        <para>TBD</para>
+        <para>
+          This should describe the receive and transmit
+          paths in mac80211/the drivers as well as
+          transmit status handling.
+        </para>
+      </sect1>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>Frame format</title>
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame format
+      </sect1>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>Alignment issues</title>
+        <para>TBD</para>
+      </sect1>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>Calling into mac80211 from interrupts</title>
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Calling mac80211 from interrupts
+      </sect1>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>functions/definitions</title>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_control
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_get
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_duration
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_get
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_queues
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues
+      </sect1>
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="filters">
+      <title>Frame filtering</title>
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame filtering
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_filter_flags
+    </chapter>
+  </part>
+
+  <part id="advanced">
+    <title>Advanced driver interface</title>
+    <partintro>
+      <para>
+       Information contained within this part of the book is
+       of interest only for advanced interaction of mac80211
+       with drivers to exploit more hardware capabilities and
+       improve performance.
+      </para>
+    </partintro>
+
+    <chapter id="hardware-crypto-offload">
+      <title>Hardware crypto acceleration</title>
+!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Hardware crypto acceleration
+<!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order -->
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h set_key_cmd
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_conf
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_alg
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_flags
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="qos">
+      <title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats_data
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="AP">
+      <title>Access point mode support</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>Some parts of the if_conf should be discussed here instead</para>
+      <para>
+        Insert notes about VLAN interfaces with hw crypto here or
+        in the hw crypto chapter.
+      </para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_buffered_bc
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_get
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="multi-iface">
+      <title>Supporting multiple virtual interfaces</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>
+        Note: WDS with identical MAC address should almost always be OK
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Insert notes about having multiple virtual interfaces with
+        different MAC addresses here, note which configurations are
+        supported by mac80211, add notes about supporting hw crypto
+        with it.
+      </para>
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="hardware-scan-offload">
+      <title>Hardware scan offload</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_scan_completed
+    </chapter>
+  </part>
+
+  <part id="rate-control">
+    <title>Rate control interface</title>
+    <partintro>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>
+       This part of the book describes the rate control algorithm
+       interface and how it relates to mac80211 and drivers.
+      </para>
+    </partintro>
+    <chapter id="dummy">
+      <title>dummy chapter</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+    </chapter>
+  </part>
+
+  <part id="internal">
+    <title>Internals</title>
+    <partintro>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>
+       This part of the book describes mac80211 internals.
+      </para>
+    </partintro>
+
+    <chapter id="key-handling">
+      <title>Key handling</title>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>Key handling basics</title>
+!Pnet/mac80211/key.c Key handling basics
+      </sect1>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>MORE TBD</title>
+        <para>TBD</para>
+      </sect1>
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="rx-processing">
+      <title>Receive processing</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="tx-processing">
+      <title>Transmit processing</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="sta-info">
+      <title>Station info handling</title>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>Programming information</title>
+!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_info
+!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h ieee80211_sta_info_flags
+      </sect1>
+      <sect1>
+        <title>STA information lifetime rules</title>
+!Pnet/mac80211/sta_info.c STA information lifetime rules
+      </sect1>
+    </chapter>
+
+    <chapter id="synchronisation">
+      <title>Synchronisation</title>
+      <para>TBD</para>
+      <para>Locking, lots of RCU</para>
+    </chapter>
+  </part>
+</book>

Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl

@@ -100,8 +100,8 @@
       useful documents, at the USB home page (see Resources). An excellent
       introduction to the Linux USB subsystem can be found at the USB Working
       Devices List (see Resources). It explains how the Linux USB subsystem is
-      structured and introduces the reader to the concept of USB urbs, which
-      are essential to USB drivers.
+      structured and introduces the reader to the concept of USB urbs
+      (USB Request Blocks), which are essential to USB drivers.
   </para>
   <para>
       The first thing a Linux USB driver needs to do is register itself with
@@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ static int __init usb_skel_init(void)
 module_init(usb_skel_init);
   </programlisting>
   <para>
-      When the driver is unloaded from the system, it needs to unregister
-      itself with the USB subsystem. This is done with the usb_unregister
+      When the driver is unloaded from the system, it needs to deregister
+      itself with the USB subsystem. This is done with the usb_deregister
       function:
   </para>
   <programlisting>
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ static int skel_probe(struct usb_interface *interface,
      were passed to the USB subsystem will be called from a user program trying
      to talk to the device. The first function called will be open, as the
      program tries to open the device for I/O. We increment our private usage
-     count and save off a pointer to our internal structure in the file
+     count and save a pointer to our internal structure in the file
      structure. This is done so that future calls to file operations will
      enable the driver to determine which device the user is addressing.  All
      of this is done with the following code:
@@ -252,8 +252,8 @@ file->private_data = dev;
      send to the device based on the size of the write urb it has created (this
      size depends on the size of the bulk out end point that the device has).
      Then it copies the data from user space to kernel space, points the urb to
-     the data and submits the urb to the USB subsystem.  This can be shown in
-     he following code:
+     the data and submits the urb to the USB subsystem.  This can be seen in
+     the following code:
   </para>
   <programlisting>
 /* we can only write as much as 1 urb will hold */

Documentation/HOWTO

@@ -249,9 +249,11 @@ process is as follows:
     release a new -rc kernel every week.
   - Process continues until the kernel is considered "ready", the
     process should last around 6 weeks.
-  - A list of known regressions present in each -rc release is
-    tracked at the following URI:
-    http://kernelnewbies.org/known_regressions
+  - Known regressions in each release are periodically posted to the 
+    linux-kernel mailing list.  The goal is to reduce the length of 
+    that list to zero before declaring the kernel to be "ready," but, in
+    the real world, a small number of regressions often remain at 
+    release time.
 
 It is worth mentioning what Andrew Morton wrote on the linux-kernel
 mailing list about kernel releases:
@@ -261,7 +263,7 @@ mailing list about kernel releases:
 
 2.6.x.y -stable kernel tree
 ---------------------------
-Kernels with 4 digit versions are -stable kernels. They contain
+Kernels with 4-part versions are -stable kernels. They contain
 relatively small and critical fixes for security problems or significant
 regressions discovered in a given 2.6.x kernel.
 
@@ -273,7 +275,10 @@ If no 2.6.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 2.6.x
 kernel is the current stable kernel.
 
 2.6.x.y are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@kernel.org>, and are
-released almost every other week.
+released as needs dictate.  The normal release period is approximately 
+two weeks, but it can be longer if there are no pressing problems.  A
+security-related problem, instead, can cause a release to happen almost
+instantly.
 
 The file Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt in the kernel tree
 documents what kinds of changes are acceptable for the -stable tree, and
@@ -298,7 +303,9 @@ a while Andrew or the subsystem maintainer pushes it on to Linus for
 inclusion in mainline.
 
 It is heavily encouraged that all new patches get tested in the -mm tree
-before they are sent to Linus for inclusion in the main kernel tree.
+before they are sent to Linus for inclusion in the main kernel tree.  Code
+which does not make an appearance in -mm before the opening of the merge
+window will prove hard to merge into the mainline.
 
 These kernels are not appropriate for use on systems that are supposed
 to be stable and they are more risky to run than any of the other
@@ -354,11 +361,12 @@ Here is a list of some of the different kernel trees available:
     - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com>
 	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
 
+    - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
+	git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/x86/linux-2.6-x86.git
+
   quilt trees:
-    - USB, PCI, Driver Core, and I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
+    - USB, Driver Core, and I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
 	kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/
-    - x86-64, partly i386, Andi Kleen <ak@suse.de>
-        ftp.firstfloor.org:/pub/ak/x86_64/quilt/
 
   Other kernel trees can be found listed at http://git.kernel.org/ and in
   the MAINTAINERS file.
@@ -392,8 +400,8 @@ If you want to be advised of the future bug reports, you can subscribe to the
 bugme-new mailing list (only new bug reports are mailed here) or to the
 bugme-janitor mailing list (every change in the bugzilla is mailed here)
 
-	http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
-	http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
+	http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
+	http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
 
 
 

Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX

@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+00-INDEX
+	- this file
+PCI-DMA-mapping.txt
+	- info for PCI drivers using DMA portably across all platforms
+PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt
+	- a guide describing the PCI Express Port Bus driver
+pci-error-recovery.txt
+	- info on PCI error recovery
+pci.txt
+	- info on the PCI subsystem for device driver authors
+pcieaer-howto.txt
+	- the PCI Express Advanced Error Reporting Driver Guide HOWTO

Documentation/PCI/PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+		The PCI Express Port Bus Driver Guide HOWTO
+	Tom L Nguyen tom.l.nguyen@intel.com
+			11/03/2004
+
+1. About this guide
+
+This guide describes the basics of the PCI Express Port Bus driver
+and provides information on how to enable the service drivers to
+register/unregister with the PCI Express Port Bus Driver.
+
+2. Copyright 2004 Intel Corporation
+
+3. What is the PCI Express Port Bus Driver
+
+A PCI Express Port is a logical PCI-PCI Bridge structure. There
+are two types of PCI Express Port: the Root Port and the Switch
+Port. The Root Port originates a PCI Express link from a PCI Express
+Root Complex and the Switch Port connects PCI Express links to
+internal logical PCI buses. The Switch Port, which has its secondary
+bus representing the switch's internal routing logic, is called the
+switch's Upstream Port. The switch's Downstream Port is bridging from
+switch's internal routing bus to a bus representing the downstream
+PCI Express link from the PCI Express Switch.
+
+A PCI Express Port can provide up to four distinct functions,
+referred to in this document as services, depending on its port type.
+PCI Express Port's services include native hotplug support (HP),
+power management event support (PME), advanced error reporting
+support (AER), and virtual channel support (VC). These services may
+be handled by a single complex driver or be individually distributed
+and handled by corresponding service drivers.
+
+4. Why use the PCI Express Port Bus Driver?
+
+In existing Linux kernels, the Linux Device Driver Model allows a
+physical device to be handled by only a single driver. The PCI
+Express Port is a PCI-PCI Bridge device with multiple distinct
+services. To maintain a clean and simple solution each service
+may have its own software service driver. In this case several
+service drivers will compete for a single PCI-PCI Bridge device.
+For example, if the PCI Express Root Port native hotplug service
+driver is loaded first, it claims a PCI-PCI Bridge Root Port. The
+kernel therefore does not load other service drivers for that Root
+Port. In other words, it is impossible to have multiple service
+drivers load and run on a PCI-PCI Bridge device simultaneously
+using the current driver model.
+
+To enable multiple service drivers running simultaneously requires
+having a PCI Express Port Bus driver, which manages all populated
+PCI Express Ports and distributes all provided service requests
+to the corresponding service drivers as required. Some key
+advantages of using the PCI Express Port Bus driver are listed below:
+
+	- Allow multiple service drivers to run simultaneously on
+	  a PCI-PCI Bridge Port device.
+
+	- Allow service drivers implemented in an independent
+	  staged approach.
+
+	- Allow one service driver to run on multiple PCI-PCI Bridge
+	  Port devices.
+
+	- Manage and distribute resources of a PCI-PCI Bridge Port
+	  device to requested service drivers.
+
+5. Configuring the PCI Express Port Bus Driver vs. Service Drivers
+
+5.1 Including the PCI Express Port Bus Driver Support into the Kernel
+
+Including the PCI Express Port Bus driver depends on whether the PCI
+Express support is included in the kernel config. The kernel will
+automatically include the PCI Express Port Bus driver as a kernel
+driver when the PCI Express support is enabled in the kernel.
+
+5.2 Enabling Service Driver Support
+
+PCI device drivers are implemented based on Linux Device Driver Model.
+All service drivers are PCI device drivers. As discussed above, it is
+impossible to load any service driver once the kernel has loaded the
+PCI Express Port Bus Driver. To meet the PCI Express Port Bus Driver
+Model requires some minimal changes on existing service drivers that
+imposes no impact on the functionality of existing service drivers.
+
+A service driver is required to use the two APIs shown below to
+register its service with the PCI Express Port Bus driver (see
+section 5.2.1 & 5.2.2). It is important that a service driver
+initializes the pcie_port_service_driver data structure, included in
+header file /include/linux/pcieport_if.h, before calling these APIs.
+Failure to do so will result an identity mismatch, which prevents
+the PCI Express Port Bus driver from loading a service driver.
+
+5.2.1 pcie_port_service_register
+
+int pcie_port_service_register(struct pcie_port_service_driver *new)
+
+This API replaces the Linux Driver Model's pci_module_init API. A
+service driver should always calls pcie_port_service_register at
+module init. Note that after service driver being loaded, calls
+such as pci_enable_device(dev) and pci_set_master(dev) are no longer
+necessary since these calls are executed by the PCI Port Bus driver.
+
+5.2.2 pcie_port_service_unregister
+
+void pcie_port_service_unregister(struct pcie_port_service_driver *new)
+
+pcie_port_service_unregister replaces the Linux Driver Model's
+pci_unregister_driver. It's always called by service driver when a
+module exits.
+
+5.2.3 Sample Code
+
+Below is sample service driver code to initialize the port service
+driver data structure.
+
+static struct pcie_port_service_id service_id[] = { {
+	.vendor = PCI_ANY_ID,
+	.device = PCI_ANY_ID,
+	.port_type = PCIE_RC_PORT,
+	.service_type = PCIE_PORT_SERVICE_AER,
+	}, { /* end: all zeroes */ }
+};
+
+static struct pcie_port_service_driver root_aerdrv = {
+	.name		= (char *)device_name,
+	.id_table	= &service_id[0],
+
+	.probe		= aerdrv_load,
+	.remove		= aerdrv_unload,
+
+	.suspend	= aerdrv_suspend,
+	.resume		= aerdrv_resume,
+};
+
+Below is a sample code for registering/unregistering a service
+driver.
+
+static int __init aerdrv_service_init(void)
+{
+	int retval = 0;
+
+	retval = pcie_port_service_register(&root_aerdrv);
+	if (!retval) {
+		/*
+		 * FIX ME
+		 */
+	}
+	return retval;
+}
+
+static void __exit aerdrv_service_exit(void)
+{
+	pcie_port_service_unregister(&root_aerdrv);
+}
+
+module_init(aerdrv_service_init);
+module_exit(aerdrv_service_exit);
+
+6. Possible Resource Conflicts
+
+Since all service drivers of a PCI-PCI Bridge Port device are
+allowed to run simultaneously, below lists a few of possible resource
+conflicts with proposed solutions.
+
+6.1 MSI Vector Resource
+
+The MSI capability structure enables a device software driver to call
+pci_enable_msi to request MSI based interrupts. Once MSI interrupts
+are enabled on a device, it stays in this mode until a device driver
+calls pci_disable_msi to disable MSI interrupts and revert back to
+INTx emulation mode. Since service drivers of the same PCI-PCI Bridge
+port share the same physical device, if an individual service driver
+calls pci_enable_msi/pci_disable_msi it may result unpredictable
+behavior. For example, two service drivers run simultaneously on the
+same physical Root Port. Both service drivers call pci_enable_msi to
+request MSI based interrupts. A service driver may not know whether
+any other service drivers have run on this Root Port. If either one
+of them calls pci_disable_msi, it puts the other service driver
+in a wrong interrupt mode.
+
+To avoid this situation all service drivers are not permitted to
+switch interrupt mode on its device. The PCI Express Port Bus driver
+is responsible for determining the interrupt mode and this should be
+transparent to service drivers. Service drivers need to know only
+the vector IRQ assigned to the field irq of struct pcie_device, which
+is passed in when the PCI Express Port Bus driver probes each service
+driver. Service drivers should use (struct pcie_device*)dev->irq to
+call request_irq/free_irq. In addition, the interrupt mode is stored
+in the field interrupt_mode of struct pcie_device.
+
+6.2 MSI-X Vector Resources
+
+Similar to the MSI a device driver for an MSI-X capable device can
+call pci_enable_msix to request MSI-X interrupts. All service drivers
+are not permitted to switch interrupt mode on its device. The PCI
+Express Port Bus driver is responsible for determining the interrupt
+mode and this should be transparent to service drivers. Any attempt
+by service driver to call pci_enable_msix/pci_disable_msix may
+result unpredictable behavior. Service drivers should use
+(struct pcie_device*)dev->irq and call request_irq/free_irq.
+
+6.3 PCI Memory/IO Mapped Regions
+
+Service drivers for PCI Express Power Management (PME), Advanced
+Error Reporting (AER), Hot-Plug (HP) and Virtual Channel (VC) access
+PCI configuration space on the PCI Express port. In all cases the
+registers accessed are independent of each other. This patch assumes
+that all service drivers will be well behaved and not overwrite
+other service driver's configuration settings.
+
+6.4 PCI Config Registers
+
+Each service driver runs its PCI config operations on its own
+capability structure except the PCI Express capability structure, in
+which Root Control register and Device Control register are shared
+between PME and AER. This patch assumes that all service drivers
+will be well behaved and not overwrite other service driver's
+configuration settings.

Documentation/PCI/pci.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,646 @@
+
+			How To Write Linux PCI Drivers
+
+		by Martin Mares <mj@ucw.cz> on 07-Feb-2000
+	updated by Grant Grundler <grundler@parisc-linux.org> on 23-Dec-2006
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The world of PCI is vast and full of (mostly unpleasant) surprises.
+Since each CPU architecture implements different chip-sets and PCI devices
+have different requirements (erm, "features"), the result is the PCI support
+in the Linux kernel is not as trivial as one would wish. This short paper
+tries to introduce all potential driver authors to Linux APIs for
+PCI device drivers.
+
+A more complete resource is the third edition of "Linux Device Drivers"
+by Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman.
+LDD3 is available for free (under Creative Commons License) from:
+
+	http://lwn.net/Kernel/LDD3/
+
+However, keep in mind that all documents are subject to "bit rot".
+Refer to the source code if things are not working as described here.
+
+Please send questions/comments/patches about Linux PCI API to the
+"Linux PCI" <linux-pci@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz> mailing list.
+
+
+
+0. Structure of PCI drivers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+PCI drivers "discover" PCI devices in a system via pci_register_driver().
+Actually, it's the other way around. When the PCI generic code discovers
+a new device, the driver with a matching "description" will be notified.
+Details on this below.
+
+pci_register_driver() leaves most of the probing for devices to
+the PCI layer and supports online insertion/removal of devices [thus
+supporting hot-pluggable PCI, CardBus, and Express-Card in a single driver].
+pci_register_driver() call requires passing in a table of function
+pointers and thus dictates the high level structure of a driver.
+
+Once the driver knows about a PCI device and takes ownership, the
+driver generally needs to perform the following initialization:
+
+	Enable the device
+	Request MMIO/IOP resources
+	Set the DMA mask size (for both coherent and streaming DMA)
+	Allocate and initialize shared control data (pci_allocate_coherent())
+	Access device configuration space (if needed)
+	Register IRQ handler (request_irq())
+	Initialize non-PCI (i.e. LAN/SCSI/etc parts of the chip)
+	Enable DMA/processing engines
+
+When done using the device, and perhaps the module needs to be unloaded,
+the driver needs to take the follow steps:
+	Disable the device from generating IRQs
+	Release the IRQ (free_irq())
+	Stop all DMA activity
+	Release DMA buffers (both streaming and coherent)
+	Unregister from other subsystems (e.g. scsi or netdev)
+	Release MMIO/IOP resources
+	Disable the device
+
+Most of these topics are covered in the following sections.
+For the rest look at LDD3 or <linux/pci.h> .
+
+If the PCI subsystem is not configured (CONFIG_PCI is not set), most of
+the PCI functions described below are defined as inline functions either
+completely empty or just returning an appropriate error codes to avoid
+lots of ifdefs in the drivers.
+
+
+
+1. pci_register_driver() call
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+PCI device drivers call pci_register_driver() during their
+initialization with a pointer to a structure describing the driver
+(struct pci_driver):
+
+	field name	Description
+	----------	------------------------------------------------------
+	id_table	Pointer to table of device ID's the driver is
+			interested in.  Most drivers should export this
+			table using MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(pci,...).
+
+	probe		This probing function gets called (during execution
+			of pci_register_driver() for already existing
+			devices or later if a new device gets inserted) for
+			all PCI devices which match the ID table and are not
+			"owned" by the other drivers yet. This function gets
+			passed a "struct pci_dev *" for each device whose
+			entry in the ID table matches the device. The probe
+			function returns zero when the driver chooses to
+			take "ownership" of the device or an error code
+			(negative number) otherwise.
+			The probe function always gets called from process
+			context, so it can sleep.
+
+	remove		The remove() function gets called whenever a device
+			being handled by this driver is removed (either during
+			deregistration of the driver or when it's manually
+			pulled out of a hot-pluggable slot).
+			The remove function always gets called from process
+			context, so it can sleep.
+
+	suspend		Put device into low power state.
+	suspend_late	Put device into low power state.
+
+	resume_early	Wake device from low power state.
+	resume		Wake device from low power state.
+
+		(Please see Documentation/power/pci.txt for descriptions
+		of PCI Power Management and the related functions.)
+
+	shutdown	Hook into reboot_notifier_list (kernel/sys.c).
+			Intended to stop any idling DMA operations.
+			Useful for enabling wake-on-lan (NIC) or changing
+			the power state of a device before reboot.
+			e.g. drivers/net/e100.c.
+
+	err_handler	See Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt
+
+
+The ID table is an array of struct pci_device_id entries ending with an
+all-zero entry; use of the macro DEFINE_PCI_DEVICE_TABLE is the preferred
+method of declaring the table.  Each entry consists of:
+
+	vendor,device	Vendor and device ID to match (or PCI_ANY_ID)
+
+	subvendor,	Subsystem vendor and device ID to match (or PCI_ANY_ID)
+	subdevice,
+
+	class		Device class, subclass, and "interface" to match.
+			See Appendix D of the PCI Local Bus Spec or
+			include/linux/pci_ids.h for a full list of classes.
+			Most drivers do not need to specify class/class_mask
+			as vendor/device is normally sufficient.
+
+	class_mask	limit which sub-fields of the class field are compared.
+			See drivers/scsi/sym53c8xx_2/ for example of usage.
+
+	driver_data	Data private to the driver.
+			Most drivers don't need to use driver_data field.
+			Best practice is to use driver_data as an index
+			into a static list of equivalent device types,
+			instead of using it as a pointer.
+
+
+Most drivers only need PCI_DEVICE() or PCI_DEVICE_CLASS() to set up
+a pci_device_id table.
+
+New PCI IDs may be added to a device driver pci_ids table at runtime
+as shown below:
+
+echo "vendor device subvendor subdevice class class_mask driver_data" > \
+/sys/bus/pci/drivers/{driver}/new_id
+
+All fields are passed in as hexadecimal values (no leading 0x).
+The vendor and device fields are mandatory, the others are optional. Users
+need pass only as many optional fields as necessary:
+	o subvendor and subdevice fields default to PCI_ANY_ID (FFFFFFFF)
+	o class and classmask fields default to 0
+	o driver_data defaults to 0UL.
+
+Once added, the driver probe routine will be invoked for any unclaimed
+PCI devices listed in its (newly updated) pci_ids list.
+
+When the driver exits, it just calls pci_unregister_driver() and the PCI layer
+automatically calls the remove hook for all devices handled by the driver.
+
+
+1.1 "Attributes" for driver functions/data
+
+Please mark the initialization and cleanup functions where appropriate
+(the corresponding macros are defined in <linux/init.h>):
+
+	__init		Initialization code. Thrown away after the driver
+			initializes.
+	__exit		Exit code. Ignored for non-modular drivers.
+
+
+	__devinit	Device initialization code.
+			Identical to __init if the kernel is not compiled
+			with CONFIG_HOTPLUG, normal function otherwise.
+	__devexit	The same for __exit.
+
+Tips on when/where to use the above attributes:
+	o The module_init()/module_exit() functions (and all
+	  initialization functions called _only_ from these)
+	  should be marked __init/__exit.
+
+	o Do not mark the struct pci_driver.
+
+	o The ID table array should be marked __devinitconst; this is done
+	  automatically if the table is declared with DEFINE_PCI_DEVICE_TABLE().
+
+	o The probe() and remove() functions should be marked __devinit
+	  and __devexit respectively.  All initialization functions
+	  exclusively called by the probe() routine, can be marked __devinit.
+	  Ditto for remove() and __devexit.
+
+	o If mydriver_remove() is marked with __devexit(), then all address
+	  references to mydriver_remove must use __devexit_p(mydriver_remove)
+	  (in the struct pci_driver declaration for example).
+	  __devexit_p() will generate the function name _or_ NULL if the
+	  function will be discarded.  For an example, see drivers/net/tg3.c.
+
+	o Do NOT mark a function if you are not sure which mark to use.
+	  Better to not mark the function than mark the function wrong.
+
+
+
+2. How to find PCI devices manually
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+PCI drivers should have a really good reason for not using the
+pci_register_driver() interface to search for PCI devices.
+The main reason PCI devices are controlled by multiple drivers
+is because one PCI device implements several different HW services.
+E.g. combined serial/parallel port/floppy controller.
+
+A manual search may be performed using the following constructs:
+
+Searching by vendor and device ID:
+
+	struct pci_dev *dev = NULL;
+	while (dev = pci_get_device(VENDOR_ID, DEVICE_ID, dev))
+		configure_device(dev);
+
+Searching by class ID (iterate in a similar way):
+
+	pci_get_class(CLASS_ID, dev)
+
+Searching by both vendor/device and subsystem vendor/device ID:
+
+	pci_get_subsys(VENDOR_ID,DEVICE_ID, SUBSYS_VENDOR_ID, SUBSYS_DEVICE_ID, dev).
+
+You can use the constant PCI_ANY_ID as a wildcard replacement for
+VENDOR_ID or DEVICE_ID.  This allows searching for any device from a
+specific vendor, for example.
+
+These functions are hotplug-safe. They increment the reference count on
+the pci_dev that they return. You must eventually (possibly at module unload)
+decrement the reference count on these devices by calling pci_dev_put().
+
+
+
+3. Device Initialization Steps
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+As noted in the introduction, most PCI drivers need the following steps
+for device initialization:
+
+	Enable the device
+	Request MMIO/IOP resources
+	Set the DMA mask size (for both coherent and streaming DMA)
+	Allocate and initialize shared control data (pci_allocate_coherent())
+	Access device configuration space (if needed)
+	Register IRQ handler (request_irq())
+	Initialize non-PCI (i.e. LAN/SCSI/etc parts of the chip)
+	Enable DMA/processing engines.
+
+The driver can access PCI config space registers at any time.
+(Well, almost. When running BIST, config space can go away...but
+that will just result in a PCI Bus Master Abort and config reads
+will return garbage).
+
+
+3.1 Enable the PCI device
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Before touching any device registers, the driver needs to enable
+the PCI device by calling pci_enable_device(). This will:
+	o wake up the device if it was in suspended state,
+	o allocate I/O and memory regions of the device (if BIOS did not),
+	o allocate an IRQ (if BIOS did not).
+
+NOTE: pci_enable_device() can fail! Check the return value.
+
+[ OS BUG: we don't check resource allocations before enabling those
+  resources. The sequence would make more sense if we called
+  pci_request_resources() before calling pci_enable_device().
+  Currently, the device drivers can't detect the bug when when two
+  devices have been allocated the same range. This is not a common
+  problem and unlikely to get fixed soon.
+
+  This has been discussed before but not changed as of 2.6.19:
+	http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/3/2/194
+]
+
+pci_set_master() will enable DMA by setting the bus master bit
+in the PCI_COMMAND register. It also fixes the latency timer value if
+it's set to something bogus by the BIOS.
+
+If the PCI device can use the PCI Memory-Write-Invalidate transaction,
+call pci_set_mwi().  This enables the PCI_COMMAND bit for Mem-Wr-Inval
+and also ensures that the cache line size register is set correctly.
+Check the return value of pci_set_mwi() as not all architectures
+or chip-sets may support Memory-Write-Invalidate.  Alternatively,
+if Mem-Wr-Inval would be nice to have but is not required, call
+pci_try_set_mwi() to have the system do its best effort at enabling
+Mem-Wr-Inval.
+
+
+3.2 Request MMIO/IOP resources
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Memory (MMIO), and I/O port addresses should NOT be read directly
+from the PCI device config space. Use the values in the pci_dev structure
+as the PCI "bus address" might have been remapped to a "host physical"
+address by the arch/chip-set specific kernel support.
+
+See Documentation/IO-mapping.txt for how to access device registers
+or device memory.
+
+The device driver needs to call pci_request_region() to verify
+no other device is already using the same address resource.
+Conversely, drivers should call pci_release_region() AFTER
+calling pci_disable_device().
+The idea is to prevent two devices colliding on the same address range.
+
+[ See OS BUG comment above. Currently (2.6.19), The driver can only
+  determine MMIO and IO Port resource availability _after_ calling
+  pci_enable_device(). ]
+
+Generic flavors of pci_request_region() are request_mem_region()
+(for MMIO ranges) and request_region() (for IO Port ranges).
+Use these for address resources that are not described by "normal" PCI
+BARs.
+
+Also see pci_request_selected_regions() below.
+
+
+3.3 Set the DMA mask size
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+[ If anything below doesn't make sense, please refer to
+  Documentation/DMA-API.txt. This section is just a reminder that
+  drivers need to indicate DMA capabilities of the device and is not
+  an authoritative source for DMA interfaces. ]
+
+While all drivers should explicitly indicate the DMA capability
+(e.g. 32 or 64 bit) of the PCI bus master, devices with more than
+32-bit bus master capability for streaming data need the driver
+to "register" this capability by calling pci_set_dma_mask() with
+appropriate parameters.  In general this allows more efficient DMA
+on systems where System RAM exists above 4G _physical_ address.
+
+Drivers for all PCI-X and PCIe compliant devices must call
+pci_set_dma_mask() as they are 64-bit DMA devices.
+
+Similarly, drivers must also "register" this capability if the device
+can directly address "consistent memory" in System RAM above 4G physical
+address by calling pci_set_consistent_dma_mask().
+Again, this includes drivers for all PCI-X and PCIe compliant devices.
+Many 64-bit "PCI" devices (before PCI-X) and some PCI-X devices are
+64-bit DMA capable for payload ("streaming") data but not control
+("consistent") data.
+
+
+3.4 Setup shared control data
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Once the DMA masks are set, the driver can allocate "consistent" (a.k.a. shared)
+memory.  See Documentation/DMA-API.txt for a full description of
+the DMA APIs. This section is just a reminder that it needs to be done
+before enabling DMA on the device.
+
+
+3.5 Initialize device registers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Some drivers will need specific "capability" fields programmed
+or other "vendor specific" register initialized or reset.
+E.g. clearing pending interrupts.
+
+
+3.6 Register IRQ handler
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+While calling request_irq() is the last step described here,
+this is often just another intermediate step to initialize a device.
+This step can often be deferred until the device is opened for use.
+
+All interrupt handlers for IRQ lines should be registered with IRQF_SHARED
+and use the devid to map IRQs to devices (remember that all PCI IRQ lines
+can be shared).
+
+request_irq() will associate an interrupt handler and device handle
+with an interrupt number. Historically interrupt numbers represent
+IRQ lines which run from the PCI device to the Interrupt controller.
+With MSI and MSI-X (more below) the interrupt number is a CPU "vector".
+
+request_irq() also enables the interrupt. Make sure the device is
+quiesced and does not have any interrupts pending before registering
+the interrupt handler.
+
+MSI and MSI-X are PCI capabilities. Both are "Message Signaled Interrupts"
+which deliver interrupts to the CPU via a DMA write to a Local APIC.
+The fundamental difference between MSI and MSI-X is how multiple
+"vectors" get allocated. MSI requires contiguous blocks of vectors
+while MSI-X can allocate several individual ones.
+
+MSI capability can be enabled by calling pci_enable_msi() or
+pci_enable_msix() before calling request_irq(). This causes
+the PCI support to program CPU vector data into the PCI device
+capability registers.
+
+If your PCI device supports both, try to enable MSI-X first.
+Only one can be enabled at a time.  Many architectures, chip-sets,
+or BIOSes do NOT support MSI or MSI-X and the call to pci_enable_msi/msix
+will fail. This is important to note since many drivers have
+two (or more) interrupt handlers: one for MSI/MSI-X and another for IRQs.
+They choose which handler to register with request_irq() based on the
+return value from pci_enable_msi/msix().
+
+There are (at least) two really good reasons for using MSI:
+1) MSI is an exclusive interrupt vector by definition.
+   This means the interrupt handler doesn't have to verify
+   its device caused the interrupt.
+
+2) MSI avoids DMA/IRQ race conditions. DMA to host memory is guaranteed
+   to be visible to the host CPU(s) when the MSI is delivered. This
+   is important for both data coherency and avoiding stale control data.
+   This guarantee allows the driver to omit MMIO reads to flush
+   the DMA stream.
+
+See drivers/infiniband/hw/mthca/ or drivers/net/tg3.c for examples
+of MSI/MSI-X usage.
+
+
+
+4. PCI device shutdown
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+When a PCI device driver is being unloaded, most of the following
+steps need to be performed:
+
+	Disable the device from generating IRQs
+	Release the IRQ (free_irq())
+	Stop all DMA activity
+	Release DMA buffers (both streaming and consistent)
+	Unregister from other subsystems (e.g. scsi or netdev)
+	Disable device from responding to MMIO/IO Port addresses
+	Release MMIO/IO Port resource(s)
+
+
+4.1 Stop IRQs on the device
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+How to do this is chip/device specific. If it's not done, it opens
+the possibility of a "screaming interrupt" if (and only if)
+the IRQ is shared with another device.
+
+When the shared IRQ handler is "unhooked", the remaining devices
+using the same IRQ line will still need the IRQ enabled. Thus if the
+"unhooked" device asserts IRQ line, the system will respond assuming
+it was one of the remaining devices asserted the IRQ line. Since none
+of the other devices will handle the IRQ, the system will "hang" until
+it decides the IRQ isn't going to get handled and masks the IRQ (100,000
+iterations later). Once the shared IRQ is masked, the remaining devices
+will stop functioning properly. Not a nice situation.
+
+This is another reason to use MSI or MSI-X if it's available.
+MSI and MSI-X are defined to be exclusive interrupts and thus
+are not susceptible to the "screaming interrupt" problem.
+
+
+4.2 Release the IRQ
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Once the device is quiesced (no more IRQs), one can call free_irq().
+This function will return control once any pending IRQs are handled,
+"unhook" the drivers IRQ handler from that IRQ, and finally release
+the IRQ if no one else is using it.
+
+
+4.3 Stop all DMA activity
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+It's extremely important to stop all DMA operations BEFORE attempting
+to deallocate DMA control data. Failure to do so can result in memory
+corruption, hangs, and on some chip-sets a hard crash.
+
+Stopping DMA after stopping the IRQs can avoid races where the
+IRQ handler might restart DMA engines.
+
+While this step sounds obvious and trivial, several "mature" drivers
+didn't get this step right in the past.
+
+
+4.4 Release DMA buffers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Once DMA is stopped, clean up streaming DMA first.
+I.e. unmap data buffers and return buffers to "upstream"
+owners if there is one.
+
+Then clean up "consistent" buffers which contain the control data.
+
+See Documentation/DMA-API.txt for details on unmapping interfaces.
+
+
+4.5 Unregister from other subsystems
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Most low level PCI device drivers support some other subsystem
+like USB, ALSA, SCSI, NetDev, Infiniband, etc. Make sure your
+driver isn't losing resources from that other subsystem.
+If this happens, typically the symptom is an Oops (panic) when
+the subsystem attempts to call into a driver that has been unloaded.
+
+
+4.6 Disable Device from responding to MMIO/IO Port addresses
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+io_unmap() MMIO or IO Port resources and then call pci_disable_device().
+This is the symmetric opposite of pci_enable_device().
+Do not access device registers after calling pci_disable_device().
+
+
+4.7 Release MMIO/IO Port Resource(s)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Call pci_release_region() to mark the MMIO or IO Port range as available.
+Failure to do so usually results in the inability to reload the driver.
+
+
+
+5. How to access PCI config space
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+You can use pci_(read|write)_config_(byte|word|dword) to access the config
+space of a device represented by struct pci_dev *. All these functions return 0
+when successful or an error code (PCIBIOS_...) which can be translated to a text
+string by pcibios_strerror. Most drivers expect that accesses to valid PCI
+devices don't fail.
+
+If you don't have a struct pci_dev available, you can call
+pci_bus_(read|write)_config_(byte|word|dword) to access a given device
+and function on that bus.
+
+If you access fields in the standard portion of the config header, please
+use symbolic names of locations and bits declared in <linux/pci.h>.
+
+If you need to access Extended PCI Capability registers, just call
+pci_find_capability() for the particular capability and it will find the
+corresponding register block for you.
+
+
+
+6. Other interesting functions
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+pci_find_slot()			Find pci_dev corresponding to given bus and
+				slot numbers.
+pci_set_power_state()		Set PCI Power Management state (0=D0 ... 3=D3)
+pci_find_capability()		Find specified capability in device's capability
+				list.
+pci_resource_start()		Returns bus start address for a given PCI region
+pci_resource_end()		Returns bus end address for a given PCI region
+pci_resource_len()		Returns the byte length of a PCI region
+pci_set_drvdata()		Set private driver data pointer for a pci_dev
+pci_get_drvdata()		Return private driver data pointer for a pci_dev
+pci_set_mwi()			Enable Memory-Write-Invalidate transactions.
+pci_clear_mwi()			Disable Memory-Write-Invalidate transactions.
+
+
+
+7. Miscellaneous hints
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+When displaying PCI device names to the user (for example when a driver wants
+to tell the user what card has it found), please use pci_name(pci_dev).
+
+Always refer to the PCI devices by a pointer to the pci_dev structure.
+All PCI layer functions use this identification and it's the only
+reasonable one. Don't use bus/slot/function numbers except for very
+special purposes -- on systems with multiple primary buses their semantics
+can be pretty complex.
+
+Don't try to turn on Fast Back to Back writes in your driver.  All devices
+on the bus need to be capable of doing it, so this is something which needs
+to be handled by platform and generic code, not individual drivers.
+
+
+
+8. Vendor and device identifications
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+One is not not required to add new device ids to include/linux/pci_ids.h.
+Please add PCI_VENDOR_ID_xxx for vendors and a hex constant for device ids.
+
+PCI_VENDOR_ID_xxx constants are re-used. The device ids are arbitrary
+hex numbers (vendor controlled) and normally used only in a single
+location, the pci_device_id table.
+
+Please DO submit new vendor/device ids to pciids.sourceforge.net project.
+
+
+
+9. Obsolete functions
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+There are several functions which you might come across when trying to
+port an old driver to the new PCI interface.  They are no longer present
+in the kernel as they aren't compatible with hotplug or PCI domains or
+having sane locking.
+
+pci_find_device()	Superseded by pci_get_device()
+pci_find_subsys()	Superseded by pci_get_subsys()
+pci_find_slot()		Superseded by pci_get_slot()
+
+
+The alternative is the traditional PCI device driver that walks PCI
+device lists. This is still possible but discouraged.
+
+
+
+10. MMIO Space and "Write Posting"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Converting a driver from using I/O Port space to using MMIO space
+often requires some additional changes. Specifically, "write posting"
+needs to be handled. Many drivers (e.g. tg3, acenic, sym53c8xx_2)
+already do this. I/O Port space guarantees write transactions reach the PCI
+device before the CPU can continue. Writes to MMIO space allow the CPU
+to continue before the transaction reaches the PCI device. HW weenies
+call this "Write Posting" because the write completion is "posted" to
+the CPU before the transaction has reached its destination.
+
+Thus, timing sensitive code should add readl() where the CPU is
+expected to wait before doing other work.  The classic "bit banging"
+sequence works fine for I/O Port space:
+
+       for (i = 8; --i; val >>= 1) {
+               outb(val & 1, ioport_reg);      /* write bit */
+               udelay(10);
+       }
+
+The same sequence for MMIO space should be:
+
+       for (i = 8; --i; val >>= 1) {
+               writeb(val & 1, mmio_reg);      /* write bit */
+               readb(safe_mmio_reg);           /* flush posted write */
+               udelay(10);
+       }
+
+It is important that "safe_mmio_reg" not have any side effects that
+interferes with the correct operation of the device.
+
+Another case to watch out for is when resetting a PCI device. Use PCI
+Configuration space reads to flush the writel(). This will gracefully
+handle the PCI master abort on all platforms if the PCI device is
+expected to not respond to a readl().  Most x86 platforms will allow
+MMIO reads to master abort (a.k.a. "Soft Fail") and return garbage
+(e.g. ~0). But many RISC platforms will crash (a.k.a."Hard Fail").
+

Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+   The PCI Express Advanced Error Reporting Driver Guide HOWTO
+		T. Long Nguyen	<tom.l.nguyen@intel.com>
+		Yanmin Zhang	<yanmin.zhang@intel.com>
+				07/29/2006
+
+
+1. Overview
+
+1.1 About this guide
+
+This guide describes the basics of the PCI Express Advanced Error
+Reporting (AER) driver and provides information on how to use it, as
+well as how to enable the drivers of endpoint devices to conform with
+PCI Express AER driver.
+
+1.2 Copyright © Intel Corporation 2006.
+
+1.3 What is the PCI Express AER Driver?
+
+PCI Express error signaling can occur on the PCI Express link itself
+or on behalf of transactions initiated on the link. PCI Express
+defines two error reporting paradigms: the baseline capability and
+the Advanced Error Reporting capability. The baseline capability is
+required of all PCI Express components providing a minimum defined
+set of error reporting requirements. Advanced Error Reporting
+capability is implemented with a PCI Express advanced error reporting
+extended capability structure providing more robust error reporting.
+
+The PCI Express AER driver provides the infrastructure to support PCI
+Express Advanced Error Reporting capability. The PCI Express AER
+driver provides three basic functions:
+
+-	Gathers the comprehensive error information if errors occurred.
+-	Reports error to the users.
+-	Performs error recovery actions.
+
+AER driver only attaches root ports which support PCI-Express AER
+capability.
+
+
+2. User Guide
+
+2.1 Include the PCI Express AER Root Driver into the Linux Kernel
+
+The PCI Express AER Root driver is a Root Port service driver attached
+to the PCI Express Port Bus driver. If a user wants to use it, the driver
+has to be compiled. Option CONFIG_PCIEAER supports this capability. It
+depends on CONFIG_PCIEPORTBUS, so pls. set CONFIG_PCIEPORTBUS=y and
+CONFIG_PCIEAER = y.
+
+2.2 Load PCI Express AER Root Driver
+There is a case where a system has AER support in BIOS. Enabling the AER
+Root driver and having AER support in BIOS may result unpredictable
+behavior. To avoid this conflict, a successful load of the AER Root driver
+requires ACPI _OSC support in the BIOS to allow the AER Root driver to
+request for native control of AER. See the PCI FW 3.0 Specification for
+details regarding OSC usage. Currently, lots of firmwares don't provide
+_OSC support while they use PCI Express. To support such firmwares,
+forceload, a parameter of type bool, could enable AER to continue to
+be initiated although firmwares have no _OSC support. To enable the
+walkaround, pls. add aerdriver.forceload=y to kernel boot parameter line
+when booting kernel. Note that forceload=n by default.
+
+2.3 AER error output
+When a PCI-E AER error is captured, an error message will be outputed to
+console. If it's a correctable error, it is outputed as a warning.
+Otherwise, it is printed as an error. So users could choose different
+log level to filter out correctable error messages.
+
+Below shows an example.
++------ PCI-Express Device Error -----+
+Error Severity          : Uncorrected (Fatal)
+PCIE Bus Error type     : Transaction Layer
+Unsupported Request     : First
+Requester ID            : 0500
+VendorID=8086h, DeviceID=0329h, Bus=05h, Device=00h, Function=00h
+TLB Header:
+04000001 00200a03 05010000 00050100
+
+In the example, 'Requester ID' means the ID of the device who sends
+the error message to root port. Pls. refer to pci express specs for
+other fields.
+
+
+3. Developer Guide
+
+To enable AER aware support requires a software driver to configure
+the AER capability structure within its device and to provide callbacks.
+
+To support AER better, developers need understand how AER does work
+firstly.
+
+PCI Express errors are classified into two types: correctable errors
+and uncorrectable errors. This classification is based on the impacts
+of those errors, which may result in degraded performance or function
+failure.
+
+Correctable errors pose no impacts on the functionality of the
+interface. The PCI Express protocol can recover without any software
+intervention or any loss of data. These errors are detected and
+corrected by hardware. Unlike correctable errors, uncorrectable
+errors impact functionality of the interface. Uncorrectable errors
+can cause a particular transaction or a particular PCI Express link
+to be unreliable. Depending on those error conditions, uncorrectable
+errors are further classified into non-fatal errors and fatal errors.
+Non-fatal errors cause the particular transaction to be unreliable,
+but the PCI Express link itself is fully functional. Fatal errors, on
+the other hand, cause the link to be unreliable.
+
+When AER is enabled, a PCI Express device will automatically send an
+error message to the PCIE root port above it when the device captures
+an error. The Root Port, upon receiving an error reporting message,
+internally processes and logs the error message in its PCI Express
+capability structure. Error information being logged includes storing
+the error reporting agent's requestor ID into the Error Source
+Identification Registers and setting the error bits of the Root Error
+Status Register accordingly. If AER error reporting is enabled in Root
+Error Command Register, the Root Port generates an interrupt if an
+error is detected.
+
+Note that the errors as described above are related to the PCI Express
+hierarchy and links. These errors do not include any device specific
+errors because device specific errors will still get sent directly to
+the device driver.
+
+3.1 Configure the AER capability structure
+
+AER aware drivers of PCI Express component need change the device
+control registers to enable AER. They also could change AER registers,
+including mask and severity registers. Helper function
+pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting could be used to enable AER. See
+section 3.3.
+
+3.2. Provide callbacks
+
+3.2.1 callback reset_link to reset pci express link
+
+This callback is used to reset the pci express physical link when a
+fatal error happens. The root port aer service driver provides a
+default reset_link function, but different upstream ports might
+have different specifications to reset pci express link, so all
+upstream ports should provide their own reset_link functions.
+
+In struct pcie_port_service_driver, a new pointer, reset_link, is
+added.
+
+pci_ers_result_t (*reset_link) (struct pci_dev *dev);
+
+Section 3.2.2.2 provides more detailed info on when to call
+reset_link.
+
+3.2.2 PCI error-recovery callbacks
+
+The PCI Express AER Root driver uses error callbacks to coordinate
+with downstream device drivers associated with a hierarchy in question
+when performing error recovery actions.
+
+Data struct pci_driver has a pointer, err_handler, to point to
+pci_error_handlers who consists of a couple of callback function
+pointers. AER driver follows the rules defined in
+pci-error-recovery.txt except pci express specific parts (e.g.
+reset_link). Pls. refer to pci-error-recovery.txt for detailed
+definitions of the callbacks.
+
+Below sections specify when to call the error callback functions.
+
+3.2.2.1 Correctable errors
+
+Correctable errors pose no impacts on the functionality of
+the interface. The PCI Express protocol can recover without any
+software intervention or any loss of data. These errors do not
+require any recovery actions. The AER driver clears the device's
+correctable error status register accordingly and logs these errors.
+
+3.2.2.2 Non-correctable (non-fatal and fatal) errors
+
+If an error message indicates a non-fatal error, performing link reset
+at upstream is not required. The AER driver calls error_detected(dev,
+pci_channel_io_normal) to all drivers associated within a hierarchy in
+question. for example,
+EndPoint<==>DownstreamPort B<==>UpstreamPort A<==>RootPort.
+If Upstream port A captures an AER error, the hierarchy consists of
+Downstream port B and EndPoint.
+
+A driver may return PCI_ERS_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER,
+PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT, or PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET, depending on
+whether it can recover or the AER driver calls mmio_enabled as next.
+
+If an error message indicates a fatal error, kernel will broadcast
+error_detected(dev, pci_channel_io_frozen) to all drivers within
+a hierarchy in question. Then, performing link reset at upstream is
+necessary. As different kinds of devices might use different approaches
+to reset link, AER port service driver is required to provide the
+function to reset link. Firstly, kernel looks for if the upstream
+component has an aer driver. If it has, kernel uses the reset_link
+callback of the aer driver. If the upstream component has no aer driver
+and the port is downstream port, we will use the aer driver of the
+root port who reports the AER error. As for upstream ports,
+they should provide their own aer service drivers with reset_link
+function. If error_detected returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER and
+reset_link returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_RECOVERED, the error handling goes
+to mmio_enabled.
+
+3.3 helper functions
+
+3.3.1 int pci_find_aer_capability(struct pci_dev *dev);
+pci_find_aer_capability locates the PCI Express AER capability
+in the device configuration space. If the device doesn't support
+PCI-Express AER, the function returns 0.
+
+3.3.2 int pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
+pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting enables the device to send error
+messages to root port when an error is detected. Note that devices
+don't enable the error reporting by default, so device drivers need
+call this function to enable it.
+
+3.3.3 int pci_disable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
+pci_disable_pcie_error_reporting disables the device to send error
+messages to root port when an error is detected.
+
+3.3.4 int pci_cleanup_aer_uncorrect_error_status(struct pci_dev *dev);
+pci_cleanup_aer_uncorrect_error_status cleanups the uncorrectable
+error status register.
+
+3.4 Frequent Asked Questions
+
+Q: What happens if a PCI Express device driver does not provide an
+error recovery handler (pci_driver->err_handler is equal to NULL)?
+
+A: The devices attached with the driver won't be recovered. If the
+error is fatal, kernel will print out warning messages. Please refer
+to section 3 for more information.
+
+Q: What happens if an upstream port service driver does not provide
+callback reset_link?
+
+A: Fatal error recovery will fail if the errors are reported by the
+upstream ports who are attached by the service driver.
+
+Q: How does this infrastructure deal with driver that is not PCI
+Express aware?
+
+A: This infrastructure calls the error callback functions of the
+driver when an error happens. But if the driver is not aware of
+PCI Express, the device might not report its own errors to root
+port.
+
+Q: What modifications will that driver need to make it compatible
+with the PCI Express AER Root driver?
+
+A: It could call the helper functions to enable AER in devices and
+cleanup uncorrectable status register. Pls. refer to section 3.3.
+

Documentation/PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt

@@ -1,217 +0,0 @@
-		The PCI Express Port Bus Driver Guide HOWTO
-	Tom L Nguyen tom.l.nguyen@intel.com
-			11/03/2004
-
-1. About this guide
-
-This guide describes the basics of the PCI Express Port Bus driver
-and provides information on how to enable the service drivers to
-register/unregister with the PCI Express Port Bus Driver.
-
-2. Copyright 2004 Intel Corporation
-
-3. What is the PCI Express Port Bus Driver
-
-A PCI Express Port is a logical PCI-PCI Bridge structure. There
-are two types of PCI Express Port: the Root Port and the Switch
-Port. The Root Port originates a PCI Express link from a PCI Express
-Root Complex and the Switch Port connects PCI Express links to
-internal logical PCI buses. The Switch Port, which has its secondary
-bus representing the switch's internal routing logic, is called the
-switch's Upstream Port. The switch's Downstream Port is bridging from
-switch's internal routing bus to a bus representing the downstream
-PCI Express link from the PCI Express Switch.
-
-A PCI Express Port can provide up to four distinct functions,
-referred to in this document as services, depending on its port type.
-PCI Express Port's services include native hotplug support (HP),
-power management event support (PME), advanced error reporting
-support (AER), and virtual channel support (VC). These services may
-be handled by a single complex driver or be individually distributed
-and handled by corresponding service drivers.
-
-4. Why use the PCI Express Port Bus Driver?
-
-In existing Linux kernels, the Linux Device Driver Model allows a
-physical device to be handled by only a single driver. The PCI
-Express Port is a PCI-PCI Bridge device with multiple distinct
-services. To maintain a clean and simple solution each service
-may have its own software service driver. In this case several
-service drivers will compete for a single PCI-PCI Bridge device.
-For example, if the PCI Express Root Port native hotplug service
-driver is loaded first, it claims a PCI-PCI Bridge Root Port. The
-kernel therefore does not load other service drivers for that Root
-Port. In other words, it is impossible to have multiple service
-drivers load and run on a PCI-PCI Bridge device simultaneously
-using the current driver model.
-
-To enable multiple service drivers running simultaneously requires
-having a PCI Express Port Bus driver, which manages all populated
-PCI Express Ports and distributes all provided service requests
-to the corresponding service drivers as required. Some key
-advantages of using the PCI Express Port Bus driver are listed below:
-
-	- Allow multiple service drivers to run simultaneously on
-	  a PCI-PCI Bridge Port device.
-
-	- Allow service drivers implemented in an independent
-	  staged approach.
-	
-	- Allow one service driver to run on multiple PCI-PCI Bridge
-	  Port devices. 
-
-	- Manage and distribute resources of a PCI-PCI Bridge Port
-	  device to requested service drivers.
-
-5. Configuring the PCI Express Port Bus Driver vs. Service Drivers
-
-5.1 Including the PCI Express Port Bus Driver Support into the Kernel
-
-Including the PCI Express Port Bus driver depends on whether the PCI
-Express support is included in the kernel config. The kernel will
-automatically include the PCI Express Port Bus driver as a kernel
-driver when the PCI Express support is enabled in the kernel.
-
-5.2 Enabling Service Driver Support
-
-PCI device drivers are implemented based on Linux Device Driver Model.
-All service drivers are PCI device drivers. As discussed above, it is
-impossible to load any service driver once the kernel has loaded the
-PCI Express Port Bus Driver. To meet the PCI Express Port Bus Driver
-Model requires some minimal changes on existing service drivers that
-imposes no impact on the functionality of existing service drivers.
-
-A service driver is required to use the two APIs shown below to
-register its service with the PCI Express Port Bus driver (see 
-section 5.2.1 & 5.2.2). It is important that a service driver
-initializes the pcie_port_service_driver data structure, included in
-header file /include/linux/pcieport_if.h, before calling these APIs.
-Failure to do so will result an identity mismatch, which prevents
-the PCI Express Port Bus driver from loading a service driver.
-
-5.2.1 pcie_port_service_register
-
-int pcie_port_service_register(struct pcie_port_service_driver *new)
-
-This API replaces the Linux Driver Model's pci_module_init API. A
-service driver should always calls pcie_port_service_register at
-module init. Note that after service driver being loaded, calls
-such as pci_enable_device(dev) and pci_set_master(dev) are no longer
-necessary since these calls are executed by the PCI Port Bus driver.
-
-5.2.2 pcie_port_service_unregister
-
-void pcie_port_service_unregister(struct pcie_port_service_driver *new)
-
-pcie_port_service_unregister replaces the Linux Driver Model's
-pci_unregister_driver. It's always called by service driver when a
-module exits.
-
-5.2.3 Sample Code
-
-Below is sample service driver code to initialize the port service
-driver data structure.
-
-static struct pcie_port_service_id service_id[] = { {
-	.vendor = PCI_ANY_ID,
-	.device = PCI_ANY_ID,
-	.port_type = PCIE_RC_PORT,
-	.service_type = PCIE_PORT_SERVICE_AER,
-	}, { /* end: all zeroes */ }
-};
-
-static struct pcie_port_service_driver root_aerdrv = {
-	.name		= (char *)device_name,
-	.id_table	= &service_id[0],
-
-	.probe		= aerdrv_load,
-	.remove		= aerdrv_unload,
-
-	.suspend	= aerdrv_suspend,
-	.resume		= aerdrv_resume,
-};
-
-Below is a sample code for registering/unregistering a service
-driver.
-
-static int __init aerdrv_service_init(void)
-{
-	int retval = 0;
-	
-	retval = pcie_port_service_register(&root_aerdrv);
-	if (!retval) {
-		/*
-		 * FIX ME
-		 */
-	}
-	return retval;
-}
-
-static void __exit aerdrv_service_exit(void) 
-{
-	pcie_port_service_unregister(&root_aerdrv);
-}
-
-module_init(aerdrv_service_init);
-module_exit(aerdrv_service_exit);
-
-6. Possible Resource Conflicts
-
-Since all service drivers of a PCI-PCI Bridge Port device are
-allowed to run simultaneously, below lists a few of possible resource
-conflicts with proposed solutions.
-
-6.1 MSI Vector Resource
-
-The MSI capability structure enables a device software driver to call
-pci_enable_msi to request MSI based interrupts. Once MSI interrupts
-are enabled on a device, it stays in this mode until a device driver
-calls pci_disable_msi to disable MSI interrupts and revert back to
-INTx emulation mode. Since service drivers of the same PCI-PCI Bridge
-port share the same physical device, if an individual service driver
-calls pci_enable_msi/pci_disable_msi it may result unpredictable
-behavior. For example, two service drivers run simultaneously on the
-same physical Root Port. Both service drivers call pci_enable_msi to
-request MSI based interrupts. A service driver may not know whether
-any other service drivers have run on this Root Port. If either one
-of them calls pci_disable_msi, it puts the other service driver
-in a wrong interrupt mode. 
-
-To avoid this situation all service drivers are not permitted to
-switch interrupt mode on its device. The PCI Express Port Bus driver
-is responsible for determining the interrupt mode and this should be
-transparent to service drivers. Service drivers need to know only
-the vector IRQ assigned to the field irq of struct pcie_device, which
-is passed in when the PCI Express Port Bus driver probes each service
-driver. Service drivers should use (struct pcie_device*)dev->irq to
-call request_irq/free_irq. In addition, the interrupt mode is stored
-in the field interrupt_mode of struct pcie_device.
-
-6.2 MSI-X Vector Resources
-
-Similar to the MSI a device driver for an MSI-X capable device can
-call pci_enable_msix to request MSI-X interrupts. All service drivers
-are not permitted to switch interrupt mode on its device. The PCI
-Express Port Bus driver is responsible for determining the interrupt
-mode and this should be transparent to service drivers. Any attempt
-by service driver to call pci_enable_msix/pci_disable_msix may
-result unpredictable behavior. Service drivers should use
-(struct pcie_device*)dev->irq and call request_irq/free_irq.
-
-6.3 PCI Memory/IO Mapped Regions
-
-Service drivers for PCI Express Power Management (PME), Advanced
-Error Reporting (AER), Hot-Plug (HP) and Virtual Channel (VC) access
-PCI configuration space on the PCI Express port. In all cases the
-registers accessed are independent of each other. This patch assumes
-that all service drivers will be well behaved and not overwrite
-other service driver's configuration settings.
-
-6.4 PCI Config Registers
-
-Each service driver runs its PCI config operations on its own
-capability structure except the PCI Express capability structure, in
-which Root Control register and Device Control register are shared
-between PME and AER. This patch assumes that all service drivers
-will be well behaved and not overwrite other service driver's
-configuration settings.

Documentation/SubmittingPatches

@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Even if the maintainer did not respond in step #4, make sure to ALWAYS
 copy the maintainer when you change their code.
 
 For small patches you may want to CC the Trivial Patch Monkey
-trivial@kernel.org managed by Adrian Bunk; which collects "trivial"
+trivial@kernel.org managed by Jesper Juhl; which collects "trivial"
 patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
  Spelling fixes in documentation
  Spelling fixes which could break grep(1)
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
  since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
  Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file (ie. patch monkey
  in re-transmission mode)
-URL: <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/bunk/trivial/>
+URL: <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/juhl/trivial/>
 
 
 

Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+			S3C24XX NAND Support
+			====================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+Small Page NAND
+---------------
+
+The driver uses a 512 byte (1 page) ECC code for this setup. The
+ECC code is not directly compatible with the default kernel ECC
+code, so the driver enforces its own OOB layout and ECC parameters
+
+Large Page NAND
+---------------
+
+The driver is capable of handling NAND flash with a 2KiB page
+size, with support for hardware ECC generation and correction.
+
+Unlike the 512byte page mode, the driver generates ECC data for
+each 256 byte block in an 2KiB page. This means that more than
+one error in a page can be rectified. It also means that the
+OOB layout remains the default kernel layout for these flashes.
+
+
+Document Author
+---------------
+
+Ben Dooks, Copyright 2007 Simtec Electronics
+

Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt

@@ -156,6 +156,8 @@ NAND
   controller. If there are any problems the latest linux-mtd
   code can be found from http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
 
+  For more information see Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
+
 
 Serial
 ------

Documentation/block/biodoc.txt

@@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ lock themselves, if required. Drivers that explicitly used the
 io_request_lock for serialization need to be modified accordingly.
 Usually it's as easy as adding a global lock:
 
-	static spinlock_t my_driver_lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED;
+	static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(my_driver_lock);
 
 and passing the address to that lock to blk_init_queue().
 

Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex

@@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ Note that a driver must have one static structure, $<device>_dops$, while
 it may have as many structures $<device>_info$ as there are minor devices
 active. $Register_cdrom()$ builds a linked list from these. 
 
-\subsection{$Int\ unregister_cdrom(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi)$}
+\subsection{$Void\ unregister_cdrom(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi)$}
 
 Unregistering device $cdi$ with minor number $MINOR(cdi\to dev)$ removes
 the minor device from the list. If it was the last registered minor for

Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt

@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ would execute while the cli()-ed section is executing.
 
 but from now on a more direct method of locking has to be used:
 
-	spinlock_t driver_lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED;
+	DEFINE_SPINLOCK(driver_lock);
 	struct driver_data;
 
 	irq_handler (...)

Documentation/cpusets.txt

@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Portions Copyright (c) 2004-2006 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
 Modified by Paul Jackson <pj@sgi.com>
 Modified by Christoph Lameter <clameter@sgi.com>
 Modified by Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
+Modified by Hidetoshi Seto <seto.hidetoshi@jp.fujitsu.com>
 
 CONTENTS:
 =========
@@ -20,7 +21,8 @@ CONTENTS:
   1.5 What is memory_pressure ?
   1.6 What is memory spread ?
   1.7 What is sched_load_balance ?
-  1.8 How do I use cpusets ?
+  1.8 What is sched_relax_domain_level ?
+  1.9 How do I use cpusets ?
 2. Usage Examples and Syntax
   2.1 Basic Usage
   2.2 Adding/removing cpus
@@ -497,7 +499,73 @@ the cpuset code to update these sched domains, it compares the new
 partition requested with the current, and updates its sched domains,
 removing the old and adding the new, for each change.
 
-1.8 How do I use cpusets ?
+
+1.8 What is sched_relax_domain_level ?
+--------------------------------------
+
+In sched domain, the scheduler migrates tasks in 2 ways; periodic load
+balance on tick, and at time of some schedule events.
+
+When a task is woken up, scheduler try to move the task on idle CPU.
+For example, if a task A running on CPU X activates another task B
+on the same CPU X, and if CPU Y is X's sibling and performing idle,
+then scheduler migrate task B to CPU Y so that task B can start on
+CPU Y without waiting task A on CPU X.
+
+And if a CPU run out of tasks in its runqueue, the CPU try to pull
+extra tasks from other busy CPUs to help them before it is going to
+be idle.
+
+Of course it takes some searching cost to find movable tasks and/or
+idle CPUs, the scheduler might not search all CPUs in the domain
+everytime.  In fact, in some architectures, the searching ranges on
+events are limited in the same socket or node where the CPU locates,
+while the load balance on tick searchs all.
+
+For example, assume CPU Z is relatively far from CPU X.  Even if CPU Z
+is idle while CPU X and the siblings are busy, scheduler can't migrate
+woken task B from X to Z since it is out of its searching range.
+As the result, task B on CPU X need to wait task A or wait load balance
+on the next tick.  For some applications in special situation, waiting
+1 tick may be too long.
+
+The 'sched_relax_domain_level' file allows you to request changing
+this searching range as you like.  This file takes int value which
+indicates size of searching range in levels ideally as follows,
+otherwise initial value -1 that indicates the cpuset has no request.
+
+  -1  : no request. use system default or follow request of others.
+   0  : no search.
+   1  : search siblings (hyperthreads in a core).
+   2  : search cores in a package.
+   3  : search cpus in a node [= system wide on non-NUMA system]
+ ( 4  : search nodes in a chunk of node [on NUMA system] )
+ ( 5~ : search system wide [on NUMA system])
+
+This file is per-cpuset and affect the sched domain where the cpuset
+belongs to.  Therefore if the flag 'sched_load_balance' of a cpuset
+is disabled, then 'sched_relax_domain_level' have no effect since
+there is no sched domain belonging the cpuset.
+
+If multiple cpusets are overlapping and hence they form a single sched
+domain, the largest value among those is used.  Be careful, if one
+requests 0 and others are -1 then 0 is used.
+
+Note that modifying this file will have both good and bad effects,
+and whether it is acceptable or not will be depend on your situation.
+Don't modify this file if you are not sure.
+
+If your situation is:
+ - The migration costs between each cpu can be assumed considerably
+   small(for you) due to your special application's behavior or
+   special hardware support for CPU cache etc.
+ - The searching cost doesn't have impact(for you) or you can make
+   the searching cost enough small by managing cpuset to compact etc.
+ - The latency is required even it sacrifices cache hit rate etc.
+then increasing 'sched_relax_domain_level' would benefit you.
+
+
+1.9 How do I use cpusets ?
 --------------------------
 
 In order to minimize the impact of cpusets on critical kernel

Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt

@@ -41,15 +41,19 @@ to a working state and enables physical DMA by default for all remote nodes.
 This can be turned off by ohci1394's module parameter phys_dma=0.
 
 The alternative firewire-ohci driver in drivers/firewire uses filtered physical
-DMA, hence is not yet suitable for remote debugging.
+DMA by default, which is more secure but not suitable for remote debugging.
+Compile the driver with CONFIG_FIREWIRE_OHCI_REMOTE_DMA (Kernel hacking menu:
+Remote debugging over FireWire with firewire-ohci) to get unfiltered physical
+DMA.
 
-Because ohci1394 depends on the PCI enumeration to be completed, an
-initialization routine which runs pretty early (long before console_init()
-which makes the printk buffer appear on the console can be called) was written.
+Because ohci1394 and firewire-ohci depend on the PCI enumeration to be
+completed, an initialization routine which runs pretty early has been
+implemented for x86.  This routine runs long before console_init() can be
+called, i.e. before the printk buffer appears on the console.
 
 To activate it, enable CONFIG_PROVIDE_OHCI1394_DMA_INIT (Kernel hacking menu:
-Provide code for enabling DMA over FireWire early on boot) and pass the
-parameter "ohci1394_dma=early" to the recompiled kernel on boot.
+Remote debugging over FireWire early on boot) and pass the parameter
+"ohci1394_dma=early" to the recompiled kernel on boot.
 
 Tools
 -----

Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+dm-crypt
+=========
+
+Device-Mapper's "crypt" target provides transparent encryption of block devices
+using the kernel crypto API.
+
+Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> <offset>
+
+<cipher>
+    Encryption cipher and an optional IV generation mode.
+    (In format cipher-chainmode-ivopts:ivmode).
+    Examples:
+       des
+       aes-cbc-essiv:sha256
+       twofish-ecb
+
+    /proc/crypto contains supported crypto modes
+
+<key>
+    Key used for encryption. It is encoded as a hexadecimal number.
+    You can only use key sizes that are valid for the selected cipher.
+
+<iv_offset>
+    The IV offset is a sector count that is added to the sector number
+    before creating the IV.
+
+<device path>
+    This is the device that is going to be used as backend and contains the
+    encrypted data.  You can specify it as a path like /dev/xxx or a device
+    number <major>:<minor>.
+
+<offset>
+    Starting sector within the device where the encrypted data begins.
+
+Example scripts
+===============
+LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) is now the preferred way to set up disk
+encryption with dm-crypt using the 'cryptsetup' utility, see
+http://luks.endorphin.org/
+
+[[
+#!/bin/sh
+# Create a crypt device using dmsetup
+dmsetup create crypt1 --table "0 `blockdev --getsize $1` crypt aes-cbc-essiv:sha256 babebabebabebabebabebabebabebabe 0 $1 0"
+]]
+
+[[
+#!/bin/sh
+# Create a crypt device using cryptsetup and LUKS header with default cipher
+cryptsetup luksFormat $1
+cryptsetup luksOpen $1 crypt1
+]]

Documentation/dontdiff

@@ -47,7 +47,6 @@
 .mm
 53c700_d.h
 53c8xx_d.h*
-BitKeeper
 COPYING
 CREDITS
 CVS
@@ -142,6 +141,7 @@ mkprep
 mktables
 mktree
 modpost
+modules.order
 modversions.h*
 offset.h
 offsets.h
@@ -172,6 +172,7 @@ sm_tbl*
 split-include
 tags
 tftpboot.img
+timeconst.h
 times.h*
 tkparse
 trix_boot.h

Documentation/early-userspace/README

@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ the 2.7 era (it missed the boat for 2.5).
 You can obtain somewhat infrequent snapshots of klibc from
 ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/klibc/
 
-For active users, you are better off using the klibc BitKeeper
-repositories, at http://klibc.bkbits.net/
+For active users, you are better off using the klibc git
+repository, at http://git.kernel.org/?p=libs/klibc/klibc.git
 
 The standalone klibc distribution currently provides three components,
 in addition to the klibc library:

Documentation/fb/gxfb.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+[This file is cloned from VesaFB/aty128fb]
+
+What is gxfb?
+=================
+
+This is a graphics framebuffer driver for AMD Geode GX2 based processors.
+
+Advantages:
+
+ * No need to use AMD's VSA code (or other VESA emulation layer) in the
+   BIOS.
+ * It provides a nice large console (128 cols + 48 lines with 1024x768)
+   without using tiny, unreadable fonts.
+ * You can run XF68_FBDev on top of /dev/fb0
+ * Most important: boot logo :-)
+
+Disadvantages:
+
+ * graphic mode is slower than text mode...
+
+
+How to use it?
+==============
+
+Switching modes is done using  gxfb.mode_option=<resolution>... boot
+parameter or using `fbset' program.
+
+See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt for more information on modedb
+resolutions.
+
+
+X11
+===
+
+XF68_FBDev should generally work fine, but it is non-accelerated.
+
+
+Configuration
+=============
+
+You can pass kernel command line options to gxfb with gxfb.<option>.
+For example, gxfb.mode_option=800x600@75.
+Accepted options:
+
+mode_option	- specify the video mode.  Of the form
+		  <x>x<y>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]
+vram		- size of video ram (normally auto-detected)
+vt_switch	- enable vt switching during suspend/resume.  The vt
+		  switch is slow, but harmless.
+
+--
+Andres Salomon <dilinger@debian.org>

Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt

@@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ graphics devices.  These would include:
 	Intel 915GM
 	Intel 945G
 	Intel 945GM
+	Intel 965G
+	Intel 965GM
 
 B.  List of available options
 

Documentation/fb/lxfb.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+[This file is cloned from VesaFB/aty128fb]
+
+What is lxfb?
+=================
+
+This is a graphics framebuffer driver for AMD Geode LX based processors.
+
+Advantages:
+
+ * No need to use AMD's VSA code (or other VESA emulation layer) in the
+   BIOS.
+ * It provides a nice large console (128 cols + 48 lines with 1024x768)
+   without using tiny, unreadable fonts.
+ * You can run XF68_FBDev on top of /dev/fb0
+ * Most important: boot logo :-)
+
+Disadvantages:
+
+ * graphic mode is slower than text mode...
+
+
+How to use it?
+==============
+
+Switching modes is done using  lxfb.mode_option=<resolution>... boot
+parameter or using `fbset' program.
+
+See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt for more information on modedb
+resolutions.
+
+
+X11
+===
+
+XF68_FBDev should generally work fine, but it is non-accelerated.
+
+
+Configuration
+=============
+
+You can pass kernel command line options to lxfb with lxfb.<option>.
+For example, lxfb.mode_option=800x600@75.
+Accepted options:
+
+mode_option	- specify the video mode.  Of the form
+		  <x>x<y>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]
+vram		- size of video ram (normally auto-detected)
+vt_switch	- enable vt switching during suspend/resume.  The vt
+		  switch is slow, but harmless.
+
+--
+Andres Salomon <dilinger@debian.org>

Documentation/fb/metronomefb.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 			Metronomefb
 			-----------
 Maintained by Jaya Kumar <jayakumar.lkml.gmail.com>
-Last revised: Nov 20, 2007
+Last revised: Mar 10, 2008
 
 Metronomefb is a driver for the Metronome display controller. The controller
 is from E-Ink Corporation. It is intended to be used to drive the E-Ink
@@ -11,20 +11,18 @@ display media here http://www.e-ink.com/products/matrix/metronome.html .
 Metronome is interfaced to the host CPU through the AMLCD interface. The
 host CPU generates the control information and the image in a framebuffer
 which is then delivered to the AMLCD interface by a host specific method.
-Currently, that's implemented for the PXA's LCDC controller. The display and
-error status are each pulled through individual GPIOs.
+The display and error status are each pulled through individual GPIOs.
 
-Metronomefb was written for the PXA255/gumstix/lyre combination and
-therefore currently has board set specific code in it. If other boards based on
-other architectures are available, then the host specific code can be separated
-and abstracted out.
+Metronomefb is platform independent and depends on a board specific driver
+to do all physical IO work. Currently, an example is implemented for the
+PXA board used in the AM-200 EPD devkit. This example is am200epd.c
 
 Metronomefb requires waveform information which is delivered via the AMLCD
 interface to the metronome controller. The waveform information is expected to
 be delivered from userspace via the firmware class interface. The waveform file
 can be compressed as long as your udev or hotplug script is aware of the need
-to uncompress it before delivering it. metronomefb will ask for waveform.wbf
-which would typically go into /lib/firmware/waveform.wbf depending on your
+to uncompress it before delivering it. metronomefb will ask for metronome.wbf
+which would typically go into /lib/firmware/metronome.wbf depending on your
 udev/hotplug setup. I have only tested with a single waveform file which was
 originally labeled 23P01201_60_WT0107_MTC. I do not know what it stands for.
 Caution should be exercised when manipulating the waveform as there may be

Documentation/fb/modedb.txt

@@ -125,8 +125,12 @@ There may be more modes.
     amifb	- Amiga chipset frame buffer
     aty128fb	- ATI Rage128 / Pro frame buffer
     atyfb	- ATI Mach64 frame buffer
+    pm2fb	- Permedia 2/2V frame buffer
+    pm3fb	- Permedia 3 frame buffer
+    sstfb	- Voodoo 1/2 (SST1) chipset frame buffer
     tdfxfb	- 3D Fx frame buffer
     tridentfb	- Trident (Cyber)blade chipset frame buffer
+    vt8623fb	- VIA 8623 frame buffer
 
 BTW, only a few drivers use this at the moment. Others are to follow
 (feel free to send patches).

Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt

@@ -128,15 +128,6 @@ Who:	Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	vm_ops.nopage
-When:	Soon, provided in-kernel callers have been converted
-Why:	This interface is replaced by vm_ops.fault, but it has been around
-	forever, is used by a lot of drivers, and doesn't cost much to
-	maintain.
-Who:	Nick Piggin <npiggin@suse.de>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	PHYSDEVPATH, PHYSDEVBUS, PHYSDEVDRIVER in the uevent environment
 When:	October 2008
 Why:	The stacking of class devices makes these values misleading and
@@ -203,16 +194,8 @@ Who:  linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:   sk98lin network driver
-When:   Feburary 2008
-Why:    In kernel tree version of driver is unmaintained. Sk98lin driver
-	replaced by the skge driver. 
-Who:    Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@linux-foundation.org>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks
-When:	April 2008
+When:	April 2010
 
 Why:	The i386/x86_64 merge provides a symlink to the old bzImage
 	location so not yet updated user space tools, e.g. package
@@ -221,8 +204,6 @@ Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
----------------------------
-
 What:	i2c-i810, i2c-prosavage and i2c-savage4
 When:	May 2008
 Why:	These drivers are superseded by i810fb, intelfb and savagefb.
@@ -230,33 +211,6 @@ Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	bcm43xx wireless network driver
-When:	2.6.26
-Files:	drivers/net/wireless/bcm43xx
-Why:	This driver's functionality has been replaced by the
-	mac80211-based b43 and b43legacy drivers.
-Who:	John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	ieee80211 softmac wireless networking component
-When:	2.6.26 (or after removal of bcm43xx and port of zd1211rw to mac80211)
-Files:	net/ieee80211/softmac
-Why:	No in-kernel drivers will depend on it any longer.
-Who:	John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	rc80211-simple rate control algorithm for mac80211
-When:	2.6.26
-Files:	net/mac80211/rc80211-simple.c
-Why:	This algorithm was provided for reference but always exhibited bad
-	responsiveness and performance and has some serious flaws. It has been
-	replaced by rc80211-pid.
-Who:	Stefano Brivio <stefano.brivio@polimi.it>
-
----------------------------
-
 What (Why):
 	- include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_TOS.h ipt_tos.h header files
 	  (superseded by xt_TOS/xt_tos target & match)
@@ -298,17 +252,6 @@ Who:	Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	Solaris/SunOS syscall and binary support on Sparc
-When:	2.6.26
-Why:	Largely unmaintained and almost entirely unused.  File system
-	layering used to divert library and dynamic linker searches to
-	/usr/gnemul is extremely buggy and unfixable.  Making it work
-	is largely pointless as without a lot of work only the most
-	trivial of Solaris binaries can work with the emulation code.
-Who:	David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	init_mm export
 When:	2.6.26
 Why:	Not used in-tree. The current out-of-tree users used it to
@@ -318,3 +261,28 @@ Why:	Not used in-tree. The current out-of-tree users used it to
 	code / infrastructure should be in the kernel and not in some
 	out-of-tree driver.
 Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	usedac i386 kernel parameter
+When:	2.6.27
+Why:	replaced by allowdac and no dac combination
+Who:	Glauber Costa <gcosta@redhat.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	/sys/o2cb symlink
+When:	January 2010
+Why:	/sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb
+	exists as a symlink for backwards compatibility for old versions of
+	ocfs2-tools. 2 years should be sufficient time to phase in new versions
+	which know to look in /sys/fs/o2cb.
+Who:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	asm/semaphore.h
+When:	2.6.26
+Why:	Implementation became generic; users should now include
+	linux/semaphore.h instead.
+Who:	Matthew Wilcox <willy@linux.intel.com>

Documentation/filesystems/Locking

@@ -511,7 +511,6 @@ prototypes:
 	void (*open)(struct vm_area_struct*);
 	void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*);
 	int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *);
-	struct page *(*nopage)(struct vm_area_struct*, unsigned long, int *);
 	int (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct page *);
 
 locking rules:
@@ -519,7 +518,6 @@ locking rules:
 open:		no	yes
 close:		no	yes
 fault:		no	yes
-nopage:		no	yes
 page_mkwrite:	no	yes		no
 
 	->page_mkwrite() is called when a previously read-only page is
@@ -537,4 +535,3 @@ NULL.
 
 ipc/shm.c::shm_delete() - may need BKL.
 ->read() and ->write() in many drivers are (probably) missing BKL.
-drivers/sgi/char/graphics.c::sgi_graphics_nopage() - may need BKL.

Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+################################################################################
+#									       #
+#				NFS/RDMA README				       #
+#									       #
+################################################################################
+
+ Author: NetApp and Open Grid Computing
+ Date: April 15, 2008
+
+Table of Contents
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ - Overview
+ - Getting Help
+ - Installation
+ - Check RDMA and NFS Setup
+ - NFS/RDMA Setup
+
+Overview
+~~~~~~~~
+
+  This document describes how to install and setup the Linux NFS/RDMA client
+  and server software.
+
+  The NFS/RDMA client was first included in Linux 2.6.24. The NFS/RDMA server
+  was first included in the following release, Linux 2.6.25.
+
+  In our testing, we have obtained excellent performance results (full 10Gbit
+  wire bandwidth at minimal client CPU) under many workloads. The code passes
+  the full Connectathon test suite and operates over both Infiniband and iWARP
+  RDMA adapters.
+
+Getting Help
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+  If you get stuck, you can ask questions on the
+
+                nfs-rdma-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+
+  mailing list.
+
+Installation
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+  These instructions are a step by step guide to building a machine for
+  use with NFS/RDMA.
+
+  - Install an RDMA device
+
+    Any device supported by the drivers in drivers/infiniband/hw is acceptable.
+
+    Testing has been performed using several Mellanox-based IB cards, the
+    Ammasso AMS1100 iWARP adapter, and the Chelsio cxgb3 iWARP adapter.
+
+  - Install a Linux distribution and tools
+
+    The first kernel release to contain both the NFS/RDMA client and server was
+    Linux 2.6.25  Therefore, a distribution compatible with this and subsequent
+    Linux kernel release should be installed.
+
+    The procedures described in this document have been tested with
+    distributions from Red Hat's Fedora Project (http://fedora.redhat.com/).
+
+  - Install nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater on the client
+
+    An NFS/RDMA mount point can only be obtained by using the mount.nfs
+    command in nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater. To see which version of mount.nfs
+    you are using, type:
+
+    > /sbin/mount.nfs -V
+
+    If the version is less than 1.1.1 or the command does not exist,
+    then you will need to install the latest version of nfs-utils.
+
+    Download the latest package from:
+
+    http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/nfs
+
+    Uncompress the package and follow the installation instructions.
+
+    If you will not be using GSS and NFSv4, the installation process
+    can be simplified by disabling these features when running configure:
+
+    > ./configure --disable-gss --disable-nfsv4
+
+    For more information on this see the package's README and INSTALL files.
+
+    After building the nfs-utils package, there will be a mount.nfs binary in
+    the utils/mount directory. This binary can be used to initiate NFS v2, v3,
+    or v4 mounts. To initiate a v4 mount, the binary must be called mount.nfs4.
+    The standard technique is to create a symlink called mount.nfs4 to mount.nfs.
+
+    NOTE: mount.nfs and therefore nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater is only needed
+    on the NFS client machine. You do not need this specific version of
+    nfs-utils on the server. Furthermore, only the mount.nfs command from
+    nfs-utils-1.1.1 is needed on the client.
+
+  - Install a Linux kernel with NFS/RDMA
+
+    The NFS/RDMA client and server are both included in the mainline Linux
+    kernel version 2.6.25 and later. This and other versions of the 2.6 Linux
+    kernel can be found at:
+
+    ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/
+
+    Download the sources and place them in an appropriate location.
+
+  - Configure the RDMA stack
+
+    Make sure your kernel configuration has RDMA support enabled. Under
+    Device Drivers -> InfiniBand support, update the kernel configuration
+    to enable InfiniBand support [NOTE: the option name is misleading. Enabling
+    InfiniBand support is required for all RDMA devices (IB, iWARP, etc.)].
+
+    Enable the appropriate IB HCA support (mlx4, mthca, ehca, ipath, etc.) or
+    iWARP adapter support (amso, cxgb3, etc.).
+
+    If you are using InfiniBand, be sure to enable IP-over-InfiniBand support.
+
+  - Configure the NFS client and server
+
+    Your kernel configuration must also have NFS file system support and/or
+    NFS server support enabled. These and other NFS related configuration
+    options can be found under File Systems -> Network File Systems.
+
+  - Build, install, reboot
+
+    The NFS/RDMA code will be enabled automatically if NFS and RDMA
+    are turned on. The NFS/RDMA client and server are configured via the hidden
+    SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA config option that depends on SUNRPC and INFINIBAND. The
+    value of SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA will be:
+
+     - N if either SUNRPC or INFINIBAND are N, in this case the NFS/RDMA client
+       and server will not be built
+     - M if both SUNRPC and INFINIBAND are on (M or Y) and at least one is M,
+       in this case the NFS/RDMA client and server will be built as modules
+     - Y if both SUNRPC and INFINIBAND are Y, in this case the NFS/RDMA client
+       and server will be built into the kernel
+
+    Therefore, if you have followed the steps above and turned no NFS and RDMA,
+    the NFS/RDMA client and server will be built.
+
+    Build a new kernel, install it, boot it.
+
+Check RDMA and NFS Setup
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+    Before configuring the NFS/RDMA software, it is a good idea to test
+    your new kernel to ensure that the kernel is working correctly.
+    In particular, it is a good idea to verify that the RDMA stack
+    is functioning as expected and standard NFS over TCP/IP and/or UDP/IP
+    is working properly.
+
+  - Check RDMA Setup
+
+    If you built the RDMA components as modules, load them at
+    this time. For example, if you are using a Mellanox Tavor/Sinai/Arbel
+    card:
+
+    > modprobe ib_mthca
+    > modprobe ib_ipoib
+
+    If you are using InfiniBand, make sure there is a Subnet Manager (SM)
+    running on the network. If your IB switch has an embedded SM, you can
+    use it. Otherwise, you will need to run an SM, such as OpenSM, on one
+    of your end nodes.
+
+    If an SM is running on your network, you should see the following:
+
+    > cat /sys/class/infiniband/driverX/ports/1/state
+    4: ACTIVE
+
+    where driverX is mthca0, ipath5, ehca3, etc.
+
+    To further test the InfiniBand software stack, use IPoIB (this
+    assumes you have two IB hosts named host1 and host2):
+
+    host1> ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.x
+    host2> ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.y
+    host1> ping a.b.c.y
+    host2> ping a.b.c.x
+
+    For other device types, follow the appropriate procedures.
+
+  - Check NFS Setup
+
+    For the NFS components enabled above (client and/or server),
+    test their functionality over standard Ethernet using TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
+
+NFS/RDMA Setup
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+  We recommend that you use two machines, one to act as the client and
+  one to act as the server.
+
+  One time configuration:
+
+  - On the server system, configure the /etc/exports file and
+    start the NFS/RDMA server.
+
+    Exports entries with the following formats have been tested:
+
+    /vol0   192.168.0.47(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash)
+    /vol0   192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash)
+
+    The IP address(es) is(are) the client's IPoIB address for an InfiniBand HCA or the
+    cleint's iWARP address(es) for an RNIC.
+
+    NOTE: The "insecure" option must be used because the NFS/RDMA client does not
+    use a reserved port.
+
+ Each time a machine boots:
+
+  - Load and configure the RDMA drivers
+
+    For InfiniBand using a Mellanox adapter:
+
+    > modprobe ib_mthca
+    > modprobe ib_ipoib
+    > ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.d
+
+    NOTE: use unique addresses for the client and server
+
+  - Start the NFS server
+
+    If the NFS/RDMA server was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in kernel config),
+    load the RDMA transport module:
+
+    > modprobe svcrdma
+
+    Regardless of how the server was built (module or built-in), start the server:
+
+    > /etc/init.d/nfs start
+
+    or
+
+    > service nfs start
+
+    Instruct the server to listen on the RDMA transport:
+
+    > echo rdma 2050 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist
+
+  - On the client system
+
+    If the NFS/RDMA client was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in kernel config),
+    load the RDMA client module:
+
+    > modprobe xprtrdma.ko
+
+    Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), issue the mount.nfs command:
+
+    > /path/to/your/mount.nfs <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt -i -o rdma,port=2050
+
+    To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check the
+    "proto" field for the given mount.
+
+  Congratulations! You're using NFS/RDMA!

Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt

@@ -43,6 +43,7 @@ Table of Contents
   2.13	/proc/<pid>/oom_score - Display current oom-killer score
   2.14	/proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields
   2.15	/proc/<pid>/coredump_filter - Core dump filtering settings
+  2.16	/proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Preface
@@ -2348,4 +2349,41 @@ For example:
   $ echo 0x7 > /proc/self/coredump_filter
   $ ./some_program
 
+2.16	/proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+This file contains lines of the form:
+
+36 35 98:0 /mnt1 /mnt2 rw,noatime master:1 - ext3 /dev/root rw,errors=continue
+(1)(2)(3)   (4)   (5)      (6)      (7)   (8) (9)   (10)         (11)
+
+(1) mount ID:  unique identifier of the mount (may be reused after umount)
+(2) parent ID:  ID of parent (or of self for the top of the mount tree)
+(3) major:minor:  value of st_dev for files on filesystem
+(4) root:  root of the mount within the filesystem
+(5) mount point:  mount point relative to the process's root
+(6) mount options:  per mount options
+(7) optional fields:  zero or more fields of the form "tag[:value]"
+(8) separator:  marks the end of the optional fields
+(9) filesystem type:  name of filesystem of the form "type[.subtype]"
+(10) mount source:  filesystem specific information or "none"
+(11) super options:  per super block options
+
+Parsers should ignore all unrecognised optional fields.  Currently the
+possible optional fields are:
+
+shared:X  mount is shared in peer group X
+master:X  mount is slave to peer group X
+propagate_from:X  mount is slave and receives propagation from peer group X (*)
+unbindable  mount is unbindable
+
+(*) X is the closest dominant peer group under the process's root.  If
+X is the immediate master of the mount, or if there's no dominant peer
+group under the same root, then only the "master:X" field is present
+and not the "propagate_from:X" field.
+
+For more information on mount propagation see:
+
+  Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt
+
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt

@@ -122,8 +122,7 @@ stop() is the place to free it.
 	}
 
 Finally, the show() function should format the object currently pointed to
-by the iterator for output. It should return zero, or an error code if
-something goes wrong. The example module's show() function is:
+by the iterator for output.  The example module's show() function is:
 
 	static int ct_seq_show(struct seq_file *s, void *v)
 	{
@@ -132,6 +131,12 @@ something goes wrong. The example module's show() function is:
 	        return 0;
 	}
 
+If all is well, the show() function should return zero.  A negative error
+code in the usual manner indicates that something went wrong; it will be
+passed back to user space.  This function can also return SEQ_SKIP, which
+causes the current item to be skipped; if the show() function has already
+generated output before returning SEQ_SKIP, that output will be dropped.
+
 We will look at seq_printf() in a moment. But first, the definition of the
 seq_file iterator is finished by creating a seq_operations structure with
 the four functions we have just defined:
@@ -182,12 +187,18 @@ The first two output a single character and a string, just like one would
 expect. seq_escape() is like seq_puts(), except that any character in s
 which is in the string esc will be represented in octal form in the output.
 
-There is also a function for printing filenames:
+There is also a pair of functions for printing filenames:
 
 	int seq_path(struct seq_file *m, struct path *path, char *esc);
+	int seq_path_root(struct seq_file *m, struct path *path,
+			  struct path *root, char *esc)
 
 Here, path indicates the file of interest, and esc is a set of characters
-which should be escaped in the output.
+which should be escaped in the output.  A call to seq_path() will output
+the path relative to the current process's filesystem root.  If a different
+root is desired, it can be used with seq_path_root().  Note that, if it
+turns out that path cannot be reached from root, the value of root will be
+changed in seq_file_root() to a root which *does* work.
 
 
 Making it all work

Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt

@@ -176,8 +176,10 @@ implementations:
   Recall that an attribute should only be exporting one value, or an
   array of similar values, so this shouldn't be that expensive. 
 
-  This allows userspace to do partial reads and seeks arbitrarily over
-  the entire file at will. 
+  This allows userspace to do partial reads and forward seeks
+  arbitrarily over the entire file at will. If userspace seeks back to
+  zero or does a pread(2) with an offset of '0' the show() method will
+  be called again, rearmed, to fill the buffer.
 
 - On write(2), sysfs expects the entire buffer to be passed during the
   first write. Sysfs then passes the entire buffer to the store()
@@ -192,6 +194,9 @@ implementations:
 
 Other notes:
 
+- Writing causes the show() method to be rearmed regardless of current
+  file position.
+
 - The buffer will always be PAGE_SIZE bytes in length. On i386, this
   is 4096. 
 

Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt

@@ -92,6 +92,18 @@ NodeList format is a comma-separated list of decimal numbers and ranges,
 a range being two hyphen-separated decimal numbers, the smallest and
 largest node numbers in the range.  For example, mpol=bind:0-3,5,7,9-15
 
+NUMA memory allocation policies have optional flags that can be used in
+conjunction with their modes.  These optional flags can be specified
+when tmpfs is mounted by appending them to the mode before the NodeList.
+See Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt for a list of all available
+memory allocation policy mode flags.
+
+	=static		is equivalent to	MPOL_F_STATIC_NODES
+	=relative	is equivalent to	MPOL_F_RELATIVE_NODES
+
+For example, mpol=bind=static:NodeList, is the equivalent of an
+allocation policy of MPOL_BIND | MPOL_F_STATIC_NODES.
+
 Note that trying to mount a tmpfs with an mpol option will fail if the
 running kernel does not support NUMA; and will fail if its nodelist
 specifies a node which is not online.  If your system relies on that

Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt

@@ -17,6 +17,21 @@ dmask=###     -- The permission mask for the directory.
 fmask=###     -- The permission mask for files.
                  The default is the umask of current process.
 
+allow_utime=### -- This option controls the permission check of mtime/atime.
+
+                  20 - If current process is in group of file's group ID,
+                       you can change timestamp.
+                   2 - Other users can change timestamp.
+
+                 The default is set from `dmask' option. (If the directory is
+                 writable, utime(2) is also allowed. I.e. ~dmask & 022)
+
+                 Normally utime(2) checks current process is owner of
+                 the file, or it has CAP_FOWNER capability.  But FAT
+                 filesystem doesn't have uid/gid on disk, so normal
+                 check is too unflexible. With this option you can
+                 relax it.
+
 codepage=###  -- Sets the codepage number for converting to shortname
 		 characters on FAT filesystem.
 		 By default, FAT_DEFAULT_CODEPAGE setting is used.

Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt

@@ -52,16 +52,15 @@ When mounting an XFS filesystem, the following options are accepted.
 	and also gets the setgid bit set if it is a directory itself.
 
   ihashsize=value
-	Sets the number of hash buckets available for hashing the
-	in-memory inodes of the specified mount point.  If a value
-	of zero is used, the value selected by the default algorithm
-	will be displayed in /proc/mounts.
+	In memory inode hashes have been removed, so this option has
+	no function as of August 2007. Option is deprecated.
 
   ikeep/noikeep
-	When inode clusters are emptied of inodes, keep them around
-	on the disk (ikeep) - this is the traditional XFS behaviour
-	and is still the default for now.  Using the noikeep option,
-	inode clusters are returned to the free space pool.
+	When ikeep is specified, XFS does not delete empty inode clusters
+	and keeps them around on disk. ikeep is the traditional XFS
+	behaviour. When noikeep is specified, empty inode clusters
+	are returned to the free space pool. The default is noikeep for
+	non-DMAPI mounts, while ikeep is the default when DMAPI is in use.
 
   inode64
 	Indicates that XFS is allowed to create inodes at any location

Documentation/firmware_class/firmware_sample_driver.c

@@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * firmware_sample_driver.c -
- *
- * Copyright (c) 2003 Manuel Estrada Sainz
- *
- * Sample code on how to use request_firmware() from drivers.
- *
- */
-
-#include <linux/module.h>
-#include <linux/kernel.h>
-#include <linux/init.h>
-#include <linux/device.h>
-#include <linux/string.h>
-
-#include "linux/firmware.h"
-
-static struct device ghost_device = {
-	.bus_id    = "ghost0",
-};
-
-
-static void sample_firmware_load(char *firmware, int size)
-{
-	u8 buf[size+1];
-	memcpy(buf, firmware, size);
-	buf[size] = '\0';
-	printk(KERN_INFO "firmware_sample_driver: firmware: %s\n", buf);
-}
-
-static void sample_probe_default(void)
-{
-	/* uses the default method to get the firmware */
-        const struct firmware *fw_entry;
-	printk(KERN_INFO "firmware_sample_driver: a ghost device got inserted :)\n");
-
-        if(request_firmware(&fw_entry, "sample_driver_fw", &ghost_device)!=0)
-	{
-		printk(KERN_ERR
-		       "firmware_sample_driver: Firmware not available\n");
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	sample_firmware_load(fw_entry->data, fw_entry->size);
-
-	release_firmware(fw_entry);
-
-	/* finish setting up the device */
-}
-static void sample_probe_specific(void)
-{
-	/* Uses some specific hotplug support to get the firmware from
-	 * userspace  directly into the hardware, or via some sysfs file */
-
-	/* NOTE: This currently doesn't work */
-
-	printk(KERN_INFO "firmware_sample_driver: a ghost device got inserted :)\n");
-
-        if(request_firmware(NULL, "sample_driver_fw", &ghost_device)!=0)
-	{
-		printk(KERN_ERR
-		       "firmware_sample_driver: Firmware load failed\n");
-		return;
-	}
-	
-	/* request_firmware blocks until userspace finished, so at
-	 * this point the firmware should be already in the device */
-
-	/* finish setting up the device */
-}
-static void sample_probe_async_cont(const struct firmware *fw, void *context)
-{
-	if(!fw){
-		printk(KERN_ERR
-		       "firmware_sample_driver: firmware load failed\n");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printk(KERN_INFO "firmware_sample_driver: device pointer \"%s\"\n",
-	       (char *)context);
-	sample_firmware_load(fw->data, fw->size);
-}
-static void sample_probe_async(void)
-{
-	/* Let's say that I can't sleep */
-	int error;
-	error = request_firmware_nowait (THIS_MODULE, FW_ACTION_NOHOTPLUG,
-					 "sample_driver_fw", &ghost_device,
-					 "my device pointer",
-					 sample_probe_async_cont);
-	if(error){
-		printk(KERN_ERR 
-		       "firmware_sample_driver:"
-		       " request_firmware_nowait failed\n");
-	}
-}
-
-static int sample_init(void)
-{
-	device_initialize(&ghost_device);
-	/* since there is no real hardware insertion I just call the
-	 * sample probe functions here */
-	sample_probe_specific();
-	sample_probe_default();
-	sample_probe_async();
-	return 0;
-}
-static void __exit sample_exit(void)
-{
-}
-
-module_init (sample_init);
-module_exit (sample_exit);
-
-MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");

Documentation/firmware_class/firmware_sample_firmware_class.c

@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * firmware_sample_firmware_class.c -
- *
- * Copyright (c) 2003 Manuel Estrada Sainz
- *
- * NOTE: This is just a probe of concept, if you think that your driver would
- * be well served by this mechanism please contact me first.
- *
- * DON'T USE THIS CODE AS IS
- *
- */
-
-#include <linux/device.h>
-#include <linux/module.h>
-#include <linux/init.h>
-#include <linux/timer.h>
-#include <linux/slab.h>
-#include <linux/string.h>
-#include <linux/firmware.h>
-
-
-MODULE_AUTHOR("Manuel Estrada Sainz");
-MODULE_DESCRIPTION("Hackish sample for using firmware class directly");
-MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
-
-static inline struct class_device *to_class_dev(struct kobject *obj)
-{
-	return container_of(obj,struct class_device,kobj);
-}
-static inline
-struct class_device_attribute *to_class_dev_attr(struct attribute *_attr)
-{
-	return container_of(_attr,struct class_device_attribute,attr);
-}
-
-int sysfs_create_bin_file(struct kobject * kobj, struct bin_attribute * attr);
-int sysfs_remove_bin_file(struct kobject * kobj, struct bin_attribute * attr);
-
-struct firmware_priv {
-	char fw_id[FIRMWARE_NAME_MAX];
-	s32 loading:2;
-	u32 abort:1;
-};
-
-extern struct class firmware_class;
-
-static ssize_t firmware_loading_show(struct class_device *class_dev, char *buf)
-{
-	struct firmware_priv *fw_priv = class_get_devdata(class_dev);
-	return sprintf(buf, "%d\n", fw_priv->loading);
-}
-static ssize_t firmware_loading_store(struct class_device *class_dev,
-				      const char *buf, size_t count)
-{
-	struct firmware_priv *fw_priv = class_get_devdata(class_dev);
-	int prev_loading = fw_priv->loading;
-
-	fw_priv->loading = simple_strtol(buf, NULL, 10);
-	
-	switch(fw_priv->loading){
-	case -1:
-		/* abort load an panic */
-		break;
-	case 1:
-		/* setup load */
-		break;
-	case 0:
-		if(prev_loading==1){
-			/* finish load and get the device back to working
-			 * state */
-		}
-		break;
-	}
-
-	return count;
-}
-static CLASS_DEVICE_ATTR(loading, 0644,
-			 firmware_loading_show, firmware_loading_store);
-
-static ssize_t firmware_data_read(struct kobject *kobj,
-				  struct bin_attribute *bin_attr,
-				  char *buffer, loff_t offset, size_t count)
-{
-	struct class_device *class_dev = to_class_dev(kobj);
-	struct firmware_priv *fw_priv = class_get_devdata(class_dev);
-
-	/* read from the devices firmware memory */
-
-	return count;
-}
-static ssize_t firmware_data_write(struct kobject *kobj,
-				   struct bin_attribute *bin_attr,
-				   char *buffer, loff_t offset, size_t count)
-{
-	struct class_device *class_dev = to_class_dev(kobj);
-	struct firmware_priv *fw_priv = class_get_devdata(class_dev);
-
-	/* write to the devices firmware memory */
-
-	return count;
-}
-static struct bin_attribute firmware_attr_data = {
-	.attr = {.name = "data", .mode = 0644},
-	.size = 0,
-	.read = firmware_data_read,
-	.write = firmware_data_write,
-};
-static int fw_setup_class_device(struct class_device *class_dev,
-				 const char *fw_name,
-				 struct device *device)
-{
-	int retval;
-	struct firmware_priv *fw_priv;
-
-	fw_priv = kzalloc(sizeof(struct firmware_priv),	GFP_KERNEL);
-	if (!fw_priv) {
-		retval = -ENOMEM;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	memset(class_dev, 0, sizeof(*class_dev));
-
-	strncpy(fw_priv->fw_id, fw_name, FIRMWARE_NAME_MAX);
-	fw_priv->fw_id[FIRMWARE_NAME_MAX-1] = '\0';
-
-	strncpy(class_dev->class_id, device->bus_id, BUS_ID_SIZE);
-	class_dev->class_id[BUS_ID_SIZE-1] = '\0';
-	class_dev->dev = device;
-
-	class_dev->class = &firmware_class,
-	class_set_devdata(class_dev, fw_priv);
-	retval = class_device_register(class_dev);
-	if (retval){
-		printk(KERN_ERR "%s: class_device_register failed\n",
-		       __FUNCTION__);
-		goto error_free_fw_priv;
-	}
-
-	retval = sysfs_create_bin_file(&class_dev->kobj, &firmware_attr_data);
-	if (retval){
-		printk(KERN_ERR "%s: sysfs_create_bin_file failed\n",
-		       __FUNCTION__);
-		goto error_unreg_class_dev;
-	}
-
-	retval = class_device_create_file(class_dev,
-					  &class_device_attr_loading);
-	if (retval){
-		printk(KERN_ERR "%s: class_device_create_file failed\n",
-		       __FUNCTION__);
-		goto error_remove_data;
-	}
-
-	goto out;
-	
-error_remove_data:
-	sysfs_remove_bin_file(&class_dev->kobj, &firmware_attr_data);
-error_unreg_class_dev:
-	class_device_unregister(class_dev);
-error_free_fw_priv:
-	kfree(fw_priv);
-out:
-	return retval;
-}
-static void fw_remove_class_device(struct class_device *class_dev)
-{
-	struct firmware_priv *fw_priv = class_get_devdata(class_dev);
-
-	class_device_remove_file(class_dev, &class_device_attr_loading);
-	sysfs_remove_bin_file(&class_dev->kobj, &firmware_attr_data);
-	class_device_unregister(class_dev);
-}
-
-static struct class_device *class_dev;
-
-static struct device my_device = {
-	.bus_id    = "my_dev0",
-};
-
-static int __init firmware_sample_init(void)
-{
-	int error;
-
-	device_initialize(&my_device);
-	class_dev = kmalloc(sizeof(struct class_device), GFP_KERNEL);
-	if(!class_dev)
-		return -ENOMEM;
-
-	error = fw_setup_class_device(class_dev, "my_firmware_image",
-				      &my_device);
-	if(error){
-		kfree(class_dev);
-		return error;
-	}
-        return 0;
-
-}
-static void __exit firmware_sample_exit(void)
-{
-	struct firmware_priv *fw_priv = class_get_devdata(class_dev);
-	fw_remove_class_device(class_dev);
-	kfree(fw_priv);
-	kfree(class_dev);
-}
-module_init(firmware_sample_init);
-module_exit(firmware_sample_exit);
-

Documentation/gpio.txt

@@ -107,6 +107,16 @@ type of GPIO controller, and on one particular board 80-95 with an FPGA.
 The numbers need not be contiguous; either of those platforms could also
 use numbers 2000-2063 to identify GPIOs in a bank of I2C GPIO expanders.
 
+If you want to initialize a structure with an invalid GPIO number, use
+some negative number (perhaps "-EINVAL"); that will never be valid.  To
+test if a number could reference a GPIO, you may use this predicate:
+
+	int gpio_is_valid(int number);
+
+A number that's not valid will be rejected by calls which may request
+or free GPIOs (see below).  Other numbers may also be rejected; for
+example, a number might be valid but unused on a given board.
+
 Whether a platform supports multiple GPIO controllers is currently a
 platform-specific implementation issue.
 

Documentation/highuid.txt

@@ -28,8 +28,6 @@ What's left to be done for 32-bit UIDs on all Linux architectures:
   uses the 32-bit UID system calls properly otherwise.
 
   This affects at least:
-	SunOS emulation
-	Solaris emulation
 	iBCS on Intel
 
 	sparc32 emulation on sparc64

Documentation/i386/boot.txt

@@ -42,6 +42,8 @@ Protocol 2.05:	(Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable.
 Protocol 2.06:	(Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of
 		the boot command line
 
+Protocol 2.09:	(kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical
+		pointer to single linked list of struct	setup_data.
 
 **** MEMORY LAYOUT
 
@@ -170,6 +172,10 @@ Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
 0238/4	2.06+	cmdline_size	Maximum size of the kernel command line
 023C/4	2.07+	hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture
 0240/8	2.07+	hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data
+0248/4	2.08+	payload_offset	Offset of kernel payload
+024C/4	2.08+	payload_length	Length of kernel payload
+0250/8	2.09+	setup_data	64-bit physical pointer to linked list
+				of struct setup_data
 
 (1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the
     real value is 4.
@@ -512,6 +518,32 @@ Protocol:	2.07+
 
   A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch
 
+Field name:	payload_offset
+Type:		read
+Offset/size:	0x248/4
+Protocol:	2.08+
+
+  If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the
+  real-mode code to the payload.
+
+  The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and
+  uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic
+  numbers. Currently only gzip compressed ELF is used.
+  
+Field name:	payload_length
+Type:		read
+Offset/size:	0x24c/4
+Protocol:	2.08+
+
+  The length of the payload.
+
+**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM
+
+From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over
+the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an
+initial remainder of 0xffffffff.  The checksum is appended to the
+file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the
+syssize field of the header is always 0.
 
 **** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE
 
@@ -544,6 +576,28 @@ command line is entered using the following protocol:
 	covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this
 	field.
 
+Field name:	setup_data
+Type:		write (obligatory)
+Offset/size:	0x250/8
+Protocol:	2.09+
+
+  The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of
+  struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot
+  parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is
+  as follow:
+
+  struct setup_data {
+	  u64 next;
+	  u32 type;
+	  u32 len;
+	  u8  data[0];
+  };
+
+  Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of
+  linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used
+  to identify the contents of data; the len is the length of data
+  field; the data holds the real payload.
+
 
 **** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE
 

Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+Currently, kvm module in EXPERIMENTAL stage on IA64. This means that
+interfaces are not stable enough to use. So, plase had better don't run
+critical applications in virtual machine. We will try our best to make it
+strong in future versions!
+				Guide: How to boot up guests on kvm/ia64
+
+This guide is to describe how to enable kvm support for IA-64 systems.
+
+1. Get the kvm source from git.kernel.org.
+	Userspace source:
+		git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/virt/kvm/kvm-userspace.git
+	Kernel Source:
+		git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/xiantao/kvm-ia64.git
+
+2. Compile the source code.
+	2.1 Compile userspace code:
+		(1)cd ./kvm-userspace
+		(2)./configure
+		(3)cd kernel
+		(4)make sync LINUX= $kernel_dir (kernel_dir is the directory of kernel source.)
+		(5)cd ..
+		(6)make qemu
+		(7)cd qemu; make install
+
+	2.2 Compile kernel source code:
+		(1) cd ./$kernel_dir
+		(2) Make menuconfig
+		(3) Enter into virtualization option, and choose kvm.
+		(4) make
+		(5) Once (4) done, make modules_install
+		(6) Make initrd, and use new kernel to reboot up host machine.
+		(7) Once (6) done, cd $kernel_dir/arch/ia64/kvm
+		(8) insmod kvm.ko; insmod kvm-intel.ko
+
+Note: For step 2, please make sure that host page size == TARGET_PAGE_SIZE of qemu, otherwise, may fail.
+
+3. Get Guest Firmware named as Flash.fd, and put it under right place:
+	(1) If you have the guest firmware (binary) released by Intel Corp for Xen, use it directly.
+
+	(2) If you have no firmware at hand, Please download its source from
+		hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/efi-vfirmware.hg
+	    you can get the firmware's binary in the directory of efi-vfirmware.hg/binaries.
+
+	(3) Rename the firware you owned to Flash.fd, and copy it to /usr/local/share/qemu
+
+4. Boot up Linux or Windows guests:
+	4.1 Create or install a image for guest boot. If you have xen experience, it should be easy.
+
+	4.2 Boot up guests use the following command.
+		/usr/local/bin/qemu-system-ia64 -smp xx -m 512 -hda $your_image
+		(xx is the number of virtual processors for the guest, now the maximum value is 4)
+
+5. Known possibile issue on some platforms with old Firmware.
+
+If meet strange host crashe issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways:
+
+(1): Upgrade your Firmware to the latest one.
+
+(2): Applying the below patch to kernel source.
+diff --git a/arch/ia64/kernel/pal.S b/arch/ia64/kernel/pal.S
+index 0b53344..f02b0f7 100644
+--- a/arch/ia64/kernel/pal.S
++++ b/arch/ia64/kernel/pal.S
+@@ -84,7 +84,8 @@ GLOBAL_ENTRY(ia64_pal_call_static)
+	mov ar.pfs = loc1
+	mov rp = loc0
+	;;
+-	srlz.d				// seralize restoration of psr.l
++	srlz.i			// seralize restoration of psr.l
++	;;
+	br.ret.sptk.many b0
+ END(ia64_pal_call_static)
+
+6. Bug report:
+	If you found any issues when use kvm/ia64, Please post the bug info to kvm-ia64-devel mailing list.
+	https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/kvm-ia64-devel/
+
+Thanks for your interest! Let's work together, and make kvm/ia64 stronger and stronger!
+
+
+								Xiantao Zhang <xiantao.zhang@intel.com>
+											2008.3.10

Documentation/ide/ide-tape.txt

@@ -1,146 +1,65 @@
-/*
- * IDE ATAPI streaming tape driver.
- *
- * This driver is a part of the Linux ide driver.
- *
- * The driver, in co-operation with ide.c, basically traverses the
- * request-list for the block device interface. The character device
- * interface, on the other hand, creates new requests, adds them
- * to the request-list of the block device, and waits for their completion.
- *
- * Pipelined operation mode is now supported on both reads and writes.
- *
- * The block device major and minor numbers are determined from the
- * tape's relative position in the ide interfaces, as explained in ide.c.
- *
- * The character device interface consists of the following devices:
- *
- * ht0		major 37, minor 0	first  IDE tape, rewind on close.
- * ht1		major 37, minor 1	second IDE tape, rewind on close.
- * ...
- * nht0		major 37, minor 128	first  IDE tape, no rewind on close.
- * nht1		major 37, minor 129	second IDE tape, no rewind on close.
- * ...
- *
- * The general magnetic tape commands compatible interface, as defined by
- * include/linux/mtio.h, is accessible through the character device.
- *
- * General ide driver configuration options, such as the interrupt-unmask
- * flag, can be configured by issuing an ioctl to the block device interface,
- * as any other ide device.
- *
- * Our own ide-tape ioctl's can be issued to either the block device or
- * the character device interface.
- *
- * Maximal throughput with minimal bus load will usually be achieved in the
- * following scenario:
- *
- *	1.	ide-tape is operating in the pipelined operation mode.
- *	2.	No buffering is performed by the user backup program.
- *
- * Testing was done with a 2 GB CONNER CTMA 4000 IDE ATAPI Streaming Tape Drive.
- *
- * Here are some words from the first releases of hd.c, which are quoted
- * in ide.c and apply here as well:
- *
- * | Special care is recommended.  Have Fun!
- *
- *
- * An overview of the pipelined operation mode.
- *
- * In the pipelined write mode, we will usually just add requests to our
- * pipeline and return immediately, before we even start to service them. The
- * user program will then have enough time to prepare the next request while
- * we are still busy servicing previous requests. In the pipelined read mode,
- * the situation is similar - we add read-ahead requests into the pipeline,
- * before the user even requested them.
- *
- * The pipeline can be viewed as a "safety net" which will be activated when
- * the system load is high and prevents the user backup program from keeping up
- * with the current tape speed. At this point, the pipeline will get
- * shorter and shorter but the tape will still be streaming at the same speed.
- * Assuming we have enough pipeline stages, the system load will hopefully
- * decrease before the pipeline is completely empty, and the backup program
- * will be able to "catch up" and refill the pipeline again.
- *
- * When using the pipelined mode, it would be best to disable any type of
- * buffering done by the user program, as ide-tape already provides all the
- * benefits in the kernel, where it can be done in a more efficient way.
- * As we will usually not block the user program on a request, the most
- * efficient user code will then be a simple read-write-read-... cycle.
- * Any additional logic will usually just slow down the backup process.
- *
- * Using the pipelined mode, I get a constant over 400 KBps throughput,
- * which seems to be the maximum throughput supported by my tape.
- *
- * However, there are some downfalls:
- *
- *	1.	We use memory (for data buffers) in proportional to the number
- *		of pipeline stages (each stage is about 26 KB with my tape).
- *	2.	In the pipelined write mode, we cheat and postpone error codes
- *		to the user task. In read mode, the actual tape position
- *		will be a bit further than the last requested block.
- *
- * Concerning (1):
- *
- *	1.	We allocate stages dynamically only when we need them. When
- *		we don't need them, we don't consume additional memory. In
- *		case we can't allocate stages, we just manage without them
- *		(at the expense of decreased throughput) so when Linux is
- *		tight in memory, we will not pose additional difficulties.
- *
- *	2.	The maximum number of stages (which is, in fact, the maximum
- *		amount of memory) which we allocate is limited by the compile
- *		time parameter IDETAPE_MAX_PIPELINE_STAGES.
- *
- *	3.	The maximum number of stages is a controlled parameter - We
- *		don't start from the user defined maximum number of stages
- *		but from the lower IDETAPE_MIN_PIPELINE_STAGES (again, we
- *		will not even allocate this amount of stages if the user
- *		program can't handle the speed). We then implement a feedback
- *		loop which checks if the pipeline is empty, and if it is, we
- *		increase the maximum number of stages as necessary until we
- *		reach the optimum value which just manages to keep the tape
- *		busy with minimum allocated memory or until we reach
- *		IDETAPE_MAX_PIPELINE_STAGES.
- *
- * Concerning (2):
- *
- *	In pipelined write mode, ide-tape can not return accurate error codes
- *	to the user program since we usually just add the request to the
- *      pipeline without waiting for it to be serviced. In case an error
- *      occurs, I will report it on the next user request.
- *
- *	In the pipelined read mode, subsequent read requests or forward
- *	filemark spacing will perform correctly, as we preserve all blocks
- *	and filemarks which we encountered during our excess read-ahead.
- *
- *	For accurate tape positioning and error reporting, disabling
- *	pipelined mode might be the best option.
- *
- * You can enable/disable/tune the pipelined operation mode by adjusting
- * the compile time parameters below.
- *
- *
- *	Possible improvements.
- *
- *	1.	Support for the ATAPI overlap protocol.
- *
- *		In order to maximize bus throughput, we currently use the DSC
- *		overlap method which enables ide.c to service requests from the
- *		other device while the tape is busy executing a command. The
- *		DSC overlap method involves polling the tape's status register
- *		for the DSC bit, and servicing the other device while the tape
- *		isn't ready.
- *
- *		In the current QIC development standard (December 1995),
- *		it is recommended that new tape drives will *in addition*
- *		implement the ATAPI overlap protocol, which is used for the
- *		same purpose - efficient use of the IDE bus, but is interrupt
- *		driven and thus has much less CPU overhead.
- *
- *		ATAPI overlap is likely to be supported in most new ATAPI
- *		devices, including new ATAPI cdroms, and thus provides us
- *		a method by which we can achieve higher throughput when
- *		sharing a (fast) ATA-2 disk with any (slow) new ATAPI device.
- */
+IDE ATAPI streaming tape driver.
+
+This driver is a part of the Linux ide driver.
+
+The driver, in co-operation with ide.c, basically traverses the
+request-list for the block device interface. The character device
+interface, on the other hand, creates new requests, adds them
+to the request-list of the block device, and waits for their completion.
+
+The block device major and minor numbers are determined from the
+tape's relative position in the ide interfaces, as explained in ide.c.
+
+The character device interface consists of the following devices:
+
+ht0		major 37, minor 0	first  IDE tape, rewind on close.
+ht1		major 37, minor 1	second IDE tape, rewind on close.
+...
+nht0		major 37, minor 128	first  IDE tape, no rewind on close.
+nht1		major 37, minor 129	second IDE tape, no rewind on close.
+...
+
+The general magnetic tape commands compatible interface, as defined by
+include/linux/mtio.h, is accessible through the character device.
+
+General ide driver configuration options, such as the interrupt-unmask
+flag, can be configured by issuing an ioctl to the block device interface,
+as any other ide device.
+
+Our own ide-tape ioctl's can be issued to either the block device or
+the character device interface.
+
+Maximal throughput with minimal bus load will usually be achieved in the
+following scenario:
+
+     1.	ide-tape is operating in the pipelined operation mode.
+     2.	No buffering is performed by the user backup program.
+
+Testing was done with a 2 GB CONNER CTMA 4000 IDE ATAPI Streaming Tape Drive.
+
+Here are some words from the first releases of hd.c, which are quoted
+in ide.c and apply here as well:
+
+| Special care is recommended.  Have Fun!
+
+Possible improvements:
+
+1. Support for the ATAPI overlap protocol.
+
+In order to maximize bus throughput, we currently use the DSC
+overlap method which enables ide.c to service requests from the
+other device while the tape is busy executing a command. The
+DSC overlap method involves polling the tape's status register
+for the DSC bit, and servicing the other device while the tape
+isn't ready.
+
+In the current QIC development standard (December 1995),
+it is recommended that new tape drives will *in addition*
+implement the ATAPI overlap protocol, which is used for the
+same purpose - efficient use of the IDE bus, but is interrupt
+driven and thus has much less CPU overhead.
+
+ATAPI overlap is likely to be supported in most new ATAPI
+devices, including new ATAPI cdroms, and thus provides us
+a method by which we can achieve higher throughput when
+sharing a (fast) ATA-2 disk with any (slow) new ATAPI device.

Documentation/ide/ide.txt

@@ -71,29 +71,6 @@ This driver automatically probes for most IDE interfaces (including all PCI
 ones), for the drives/geometries attached to those interfaces, and for the IRQ
 lines being used by the interfaces (normally 14, 15 for ide0/ide1).
 
-For special cases, interfaces may be specified using kernel "command line"
-options.  For example,
-
-	ide3=0x168,0x36e,10	/* ioports 0x168-0x16f,0x36e, irq 10 */
-
-Normally the irq number need not be specified, as ide.c will probe for it:
-
-	ide3=0x168,0x36e	/* ioports 0x168-0x16f,0x36e */
-
-The standard port, and irq values are these:
-
-	ide0=0x1f0,0x3f6,14
-	ide1=0x170,0x376,15
-	ide2=0x1e8,0x3ee,11
-	ide3=0x168,0x36e,10
-
-Note that the first parameter reserves 8 contiguous ioports, whereas the
-second value denotes a single ioport. If in doubt, do a 'cat /proc/ioports'.
-
-In all probability the device uses these ports and IRQs if it is attached
-to the appropriate ide channel.  Pass the parameter for the correct ide
-channel to the kernel, as explained above.
-
 Any number of interfaces may share a single IRQ if necessary, at a slight
 performance penalty, whether on separate cards or a single VLB card.
 The IDE driver automatically detects and handles this.  However, this may
@@ -105,27 +82,26 @@ Drives are normally found by auto-probing and/or examining the CMOS/BIOS data.
 For really weird situations, the apparent (fdisk) geometry can also be specified
 on the kernel "command line" using LILO.  The format of such lines is:
 
-	hdx=cyls,heads,sects
-or	hdx=cdrom
+	ide_core.chs=[interface_number.device_number]:cyls,heads,sects
+or	ide_core.cdrom=[interface_number.device_number]
 
-where hdx can be any of hda through hdh, Three values are required
-(cyls,heads,sects).  For example:
+For example:
 
-	hdc=1050,32,64  hdd=cdrom
+	ide_core.chs=1.0:1050,32,64  ide_core.cdrom=1.1
 
-either {hda,hdb} or {hdc,hdd}.  The results of successful auto-probing may
-override the physical geometry/irq specified, though the "original" geometry
-may be retained as the "logical" geometry for partitioning purposes (fdisk).
+The results of successful auto-probing may override the physical geometry/irq
+specified, though the "original" geometry may be retained as the "logical"
+geometry for partitioning purposes (fdisk).
 
 If the auto-probing during boot time confuses a drive (ie. the drive works
 with hd.c but not with ide.c), then an command line option may be specified
 for each drive for which you'd like the drive to skip the hardware
 probe/identification sequence.  For example:
 
-	hdb=noprobe
+	ide_core.noprobe=0.1
 or
-	hdc=768,16,32
-	hdc=noprobe
+	ide_core.chs=1.0:768,16,32
+	ide_core.noprobe=1.0
 
 Note that when only one IDE device is attached to an interface, it should be
 jumpered as "single" or "master", *not* "slave".  Many folks have had
@@ -141,9 +117,9 @@ If for some reason your cdrom drive is *not* found at boot time, you can force
 the probe to look harder by supplying a kernel command line parameter
 via LILO, such as:
 
-	hdc=cdrom	/* hdc = "master" on second interface */
+	ide_core.cdrom=1.0	/* "master" on second interface (hdc) */
 or
-	hdd=cdrom	/* hdd = "slave" on second interface */
+	ide_core.cdrom=1.1	/* "slave" on second interface (hdd) */
 
 For example, a GW2000 system might have a hard drive on the primary
 interface (/dev/hda) and an IDE cdrom drive on the secondary interface
@@ -184,13 +160,6 @@ provided it is mounted with the default block size of 1024 (as above).
 Please pass on any feedback on any of this stuff to the maintainer,
 whose address can be found in linux/MAINTAINERS.
 
-Note that if BOTH hd.c and ide.c are configured into the kernel,
-hd.c will normally be allowed to control the primary IDE interface.
-This is useful for older hardware that may be incompatible with ide.c,
-and still allows newer hardware to run on the 2nd/3rd/4th IDE ports
-under control of ide.c.   To have ide.c also "take over" the primary
-IDE port in this situation, use the "command line" parameter:  ide0=0x1f0
-
 The IDE driver is modularized.  The high level disk/CD-ROM/tape/floppy
 drivers can always be compiled as loadable modules, the chipset drivers
 can only be compiled into the kernel, and the core code (ide.c) can be
@@ -204,9 +173,7 @@ to /etc/modprobe.conf.
 
 When ide.c is used as a module, you can pass command line parameters to the
 driver using the "options=" keyword to insmod, while replacing any ',' with
-';'.  For example:
-
-	insmod ide.o options="ide0=serialize ide1=serialize ide2=0x1e8;0x3ee;11"
+';'.
 
 
 ================================================================================
@@ -214,81 +181,48 @@ driver using the "options=" keyword to insmod, while replacing any ',' with
 Summary of ide driver parameters for kernel command line
 --------------------------------------------------------
 
- "hdx="  is recognized for all "x" from "a" to "u", such as "hdc".
-
- "idex=" is recognized for all "x" from "0" to "9", such as "ide1".
-
- "hdx=noprobe"		: drive may be present, but do not probe for it
-
- "hdx=none"		: drive is NOT present, ignore cmos and do not probe
-
- "hdx=nowerr"		: ignore the WRERR_STAT bit on this drive
-
- "hdx=cdrom"		: drive is present, and is a cdrom drive
-
- "hdx=cyl,head,sect"	: disk drive is present, with specified geometry
-
- "hdx=autotune"		: driver will attempt to tune interface speed
-			  to the fastest PIO mode supported,
-			  if possible for this drive only.
-			  Not fully supported by all chipset types,
-			  and quite likely to cause trouble with
-			  older/odd IDE drives.
-
- "hdx=nodma"		: disallow DMA
-
- "idebus=xx"		: inform IDE driver of VESA/PCI bus speed in MHz,
-			  where "xx" is between 20 and 66 inclusive,
-			  used when tuning chipset PIO modes.
-			  For PCI bus, 25 is correct for a P75 system,
-			  30 is correct for P90,P120,P180 systems,
-			  and 33 is used for P100,P133,P166 systems.
-			  If in doubt, use idebus=33 for PCI.
-			  As for VLB, it is safest to not specify it.
-			  Bigger values are safer than smaller ones.
+For legacy IDE VLB host drivers (ali14xx/dtc2278/ht6560b/qd65xx/umc8672)
+you need to explicitly enable probing by using "probe" kernel parameter,
+i.e. to enable probing for ALI M14xx chipsets (ali14xx host driver) use:
 
- "idex=base"		: probe for an interface at the addr specified,
-			  where "base" is usually 0x1f0 or 0x170
-			  and "ctl" is assumed to be "base"+0x206
+* "ali14xx.probe" boot option when ali14xx driver is built-in the kernel
 
- "idex=base,ctl"	: specify both base and ctl
+* "probe" module parameter when ali14xx driver is compiled as module
+  ("modprobe ali14xx probe")
 
- "idex=base,ctl,irq"	: specify base, ctl, and irq number
+Also for legacy CMD640 host driver (cmd640) you need to use "probe_vlb"
+kernel paremeter to enable probing for VLB version of the chipset (PCI ones
+are detected automatically).
 
- "idex=serialize"	: do not overlap operations on idex. Please note
-			  that you will have to specify this option for
-			  both the respective primary and secondary channel
-			  to take effect.
+You also need to use "probe" kernel parameter for ide-4drives driver
+(support for IDE generic chipset with four drives on one port).
 
- "idex=four"		: four drives on idex and ide(x^1) share same ports
+To enable support for IDE doublers on Amiga use "doubler" kernel parameter
+for gayle host driver (i.e. "gayle.doubler" if the driver is built-in).
 
- "idex=reset"		: reset interface after probe
+To force ignoring cable detection (this should be needed only if you're using
+short 40-wires cable which cannot be automatically detected - if this is not
+a case please report it as a bug instead) use "ignore_cable" kernel parameter:
 
- "idex=ata66"		: informs the interface that it has an 80c cable
-			  for chipsets that are ATA-66 capable, but the
-			  ability to bit test for detection is currently
-			  unknown.
+* "ide_core.ignore_cable=[interface_number]" boot option if IDE is built-in
+  (i.e. "ide_core.ignore_cable=1" to force ignoring cable for "ide1")
 
- "ide=reverse"		: formerly called to pci sub-system, but now local.
+* "ignore_cable=[interface_number]" module parameter (for ide_core module)
+  if IDE is compiled as module
 
- "ide=doubler"		: probe/support IDE doublers on Amiga
+Other kernel parameters for ide_core are:
 
-There may be more options than shown -- use the source, Luke!
+* "nodma=[interface_number.device_number]" to disallow DMA for a device
 
-Everything else is rejected with a "BAD OPTION" message.
+* "noflush=[interface_number.device_number]" to disable flush requests
 
-For legacy IDE VLB host drivers (ali14xx/dtc2278/ht6560b/qd65xx/umc8672)
-you need to explicitly enable probing by using "probe" kernel parameter,
-i.e. to enable probing for ALI M14xx chipsets (ali14xx host driver) use:
+* "noprobe=[interface_number.device_number]" to skip probing
 
-* "ali14xx.probe" boot option when ali14xx driver is built-in the kernel
+* "nowerr=[interface_number.device_number]" to ignore the WRERR_STAT bit
 
-* "probe" module parameter when ali14xx driver is compiled as module
-  ("modprobe ali14xx probe")
+* "cdrom=[interface_number.device_number]" to force device as a CD-ROM
 
-Also for legacy CMD640 host driver (cmd640) you need to use "probe_vlb"
-kernel paremeter to enable probing for VLB version of the chipset (PCI ones
-are detected automatically).
+* "chs=[interface_number.device_number]" to force device as a disk (using CHS)
 
 ================================================================================
 

Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+IDE warm-plug HOWTO
+===================
+
+To warm-plug devices on a port 'idex':
+
+# echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/delete_devices
+
+unplug old device(s) and plug new device(s)
+
+# echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/scan
+
+done

Documentation/ioctl-number.txt

@@ -183,6 +183,8 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 0xAC	00-1F	linux/raw.h
 0xAD	00	Netfilter device	in development:
 					<mailto:rusty@rustcorp.com.au>	
+0xAE	all	linux/kvm.h		Kernel-based Virtual Machine
+					<mailto:kvm-devel@lists.sourceforge.net>
 0xB0	all	RATIO devices		in development:
 					<mailto:vgo@ratio.de>
 0xB1	00-1F	PPPoX			<mailto:mostrows@styx.uwaterloo.ca>

Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt

@@ -104,14 +104,15 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
   Reverse dependencies can only be used with boolean or tristate
   symbols.
   Note:
-	select is evil.... select will by brute force set a symbol
-	equal to 'y' without visiting the dependencies. So abusing
-	select you are able to select a symbol FOO even if FOO depends
-	on BAR that is not set. In general use select only for
-	non-visible symbols (no prompts anywhere) and for symbols with
-	no dependencies. That will limit the usefulness but on the
-	other hand avoid the illegal configurations all over. kconfig
-	should one day warn about such things.
+	select should be used with care. select will force
+	a symbol to a value without visiting the dependencies.
+	By abusing select you are able to select a symbol FOO even
+	if FOO depends on BAR that is not set.
+	In general use select only for non-visible symbols
+	(no prompts anywhere) and for symbols with no dependencies.
+	That will limit the usefulness but on the other hand avoid
+	the illegal configurations all over.
+	kconfig should one day warn about such things.
 
 - numerical ranges: "range" <symbol> <symbol> ["if" <expr>]
   This allows to limit the range of possible input values for int

Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt

@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel build.
 	Sometimes, an external module uses exported symbols from another
 	external module. Kbuild needs to have full knowledge on all symbols
 	to avoid spitting out warnings about undefined symbols.
-	Two solutions exist to let kbuild know all symbols of more than
+	Three solutions exist to let kbuild know all symbols of more than
 	one external module.
 	The method with a top-level kbuild file is recommended but may be
 	impractical in certain situations.
@@ -523,6 +523,13 @@ Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel build.
 		containing the sum of all symbols defined and not part of the
 		kernel.
 
+	Use make variable KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in the Makefile
+		If it is impractical to copy Module.symvers from another
+		module, you can assign a space separated list of files to
+		KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in your Makfile. These files will be
+		loaded by modpost during the initialisation of its symbol
+		tables.
+
 === 8. Tips & Tricks
 
 --- 8.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR

Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt

@@ -366,6 +366,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			possible to determine what the correct size should be.
 			This option provides an override for these situations.
 
+	security=	[SECURITY] Choose a security module to enable at boot.
+			If this boot parameter is not specified, only the first
+			security module asking for security registration will be
+			loaded. An invalid security module name will be treated
+			as if no module has been chosen.
+
 	capability.disable=
 			[SECURITY] Disable capabilities.  This would normally
 			be used only if an alternative security model is to be
@@ -763,11 +769,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			Format: <io>[,<membase>[,<icn_id>[,<icn_id2>]]]
 
 	ide=		[HW] (E)IDE subsystem
-			Format: ide=nodma or ide=doubler or ide=reverse
-			See Documentation/ide/ide.txt.
-
-	ide?=		[HW] (E)IDE subsystem
-			Format: ide?=noprobe or chipset specific parameters.
+			Format: ide=nodma or ide=doubler
 			See Documentation/ide/ide.txt.
 
 	idebus=		[HW] (E)IDE subsystem - VLB/PCI bus speed
@@ -812,6 +814,19 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	inttest=	[IA64]
 
+	iommu=		[x86]
+		off
+		force
+		noforce
+		biomerge
+		panic
+		nopanic
+		merge
+		nomerge
+		forcesac
+		soft
+
+
 	intel_iommu=	[DMAR] Intel IOMMU driver (DMAR) option
 		off
 			Disable intel iommu driver.
@@ -828,6 +843,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			than 32 bit addressing. The default is to look
 			for translation below 32 bit and if not available
 			then look in the higher range.
+		strict [Default Off]
+			With this option on every unmap_single operation will
+			result in a hardware IOTLB flush operation as opposed
+			to batching them for performance.
 
 	io_delay=	[X86-32,X86-64] I/O delay method
 		0x80
@@ -928,8 +947,15 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	kstack=N	[X86-32,X86-64] Print N words from the kernel stack
 			in oops dumps.
 
+	kgdboc=		[HW] kgdb over consoles.
+			Requires a tty driver that supports console polling.
+			(only serial suported for now)
+			Format: <serial_device>[,baud]
+
 	l2cr=		[PPC]
 
+	l3cr=		[PPC]
+
 	lapic		[X86-32,APIC] Enable the local APIC even if BIOS
 			disabled it.
 
@@ -1134,6 +1160,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			         or
 			         memmap=0x10000$0x18690000
 
+	memtest=	[KNL,X86_64] Enable memtest
+			Format: <integer>
+			range: 0,4 : pattern number
+			default : 0 <disable>
+
 	meye.*=		[HW] Set MotionEye Camera parameters
 			See Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt.
 
@@ -1251,8 +1282,16 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	noexec		[IA-64]
 
 	noexec		[X86-32,X86-64]
+			On X86-32 available only on PAE configured kernels.
 			noexec=on: enable non-executable mappings (default)
-			noexec=off: disable nn-executable mappings
+			noexec=off: disable non-executable mappings
+
+	noexec32	[X86-64]
+			This affects only 32-bit executables.
+			noexec32=on: enable non-executable mappings (default)
+				read doesn't imply executable mappings
+			noexec32=off: disable non-executable mappings
+				read implies executable mappings
 
 	nofxsr		[BUGS=X86-32] Disables x86 floating point extended
 			register save and restore. The kernel will only save
@@ -1339,6 +1378,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	nowb		[ARM]
 
+	nptcg=		[IA64] Override max number of concurrent global TLB
+			purges which is reported from either PAL_VM_SUMMARY or
+			SAL PALO.
+
 	numa_zonelist_order= [KNL, BOOT] Select zonelist order for NUMA.
 			one of ['zone', 'node', 'default'] can be specified
 			This can be set from sysctl after boot.
@@ -1428,10 +1471,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 		nomsi		[MSI] If the PCI_MSI kernel config parameter is
 				enabled, this kernel boot option can be used to
 				disable the use of MSI interrupts system-wide.
-		nosort		[X86-32] Don't sort PCI devices according to
-				order given by the PCI BIOS. This sorting is
-				done to get a device order compatible with
-				older kernels.
 		biosirq		[X86-32] Use PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt
 				routing table. These calls are known to be buggy
 				on several machines and they hang the machine

Documentation/kprobes.txt

@@ -37,6 +37,11 @@ registration function such as register_kprobe() specifies where
 the probe is to be inserted and what handler is to be called when
 the probe is hit.
 
+There are also register_/unregister_*probes() functions for batch
+registration/unregistration of a group of *probes. These functions
+can speed up unregistration process when you have to unregister
+a lot of probes at once.
+
 The next three subsections explain how the different types of
 probes work.  They explain certain things that you'll need to
 know in order to make the best use of Kprobes -- e.g., the
@@ -190,10 +195,11 @@ code mapping.
 4. API Reference
 
 The Kprobes API includes a "register" function and an "unregister"
-function for each type of probe.  Here are terse, mini-man-page
-specifications for these functions and the associated probe handlers
-that you'll write.  See the files in the samples/kprobes/ sub-directory
-for examples.
+function for each type of probe. The API also includes "register_*probes"
+and "unregister_*probes" functions for (un)registering arrays of probes.
+Here are terse, mini-man-page specifications for these functions and
+the associated probe handlers that you'll write. See the files in the
+samples/kprobes/ sub-directory for examples.
 
 4.1 register_kprobe
 
@@ -319,6 +325,43 @@ void unregister_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
 Removes the specified probe.  The unregister function can be called
 at any time after the probe has been registered.
 
+NOTE:
+If the functions find an incorrect probe (ex. an unregistered probe),
+they clear the addr field of the probe.
+
+4.5 register_*probes
+
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+int register_kprobes(struct kprobe **kps, int num);
+int register_kretprobes(struct kretprobe **rps, int num);
+int register_jprobes(struct jprobe **jps, int num);
+
+Registers each of the num probes in the specified array.  If any
+error occurs during registration, all probes in the array, up to
+the bad probe, are safely unregistered before the register_*probes
+function returns.
+- kps/rps/jps: an array of pointers to *probe data structures
+- num: the number of the array entries.
+
+NOTE:
+You have to allocate(or define) an array of pointers and set all
+of the array entries before using these functions.
+
+4.6 unregister_*probes
+
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+void unregister_kprobes(struct kprobe **kps, int num);
+void unregister_kretprobes(struct kretprobe **rps, int num);
+void unregister_jprobes(struct jprobe **jps, int num);
+
+Removes each of the num probes in the specified array at once.
+
+NOTE:
+If the functions find some incorrect probes (ex. unregistered
+probes) in the specified array, they clear the addr field of those
+incorrect probes. However, other probes in the array are
+unregistered correctly.
+
 5. Kprobes Features and Limitations
 
 Kprobes allows multiple probes at the same address.  Currently,

Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt

@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ once you enable the radio, will depend on your hardware and driver combination.
 e.g. With the BCM4318 on the Acer Aspire 5020 series:
 
 ndiswrapper: Light blinks on when transmitting
-bcm43xx/b43: Solid light, blinks off when transmitting
+b43: Solid light, blinks off when transmitting
 
 Wireless radio control is unconditionally enabled - all Acer laptops that support
 acer-wmi come with built-in wireless. However, should you feel so inclined to

Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 		     ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
 
-                            Version 0.19
-                         January 06th, 2008
+                            Version 0.20
+                          April 09th, 2008
 
                Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
              Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
@@ -18,6 +18,11 @@ This driver used to be named ibm-acpi until kernel 2.6.21 and release
 moved to the drivers/misc tree and renamed to thinkpad-acpi for kernel
 2.6.22, and release 0.14.
 
+The driver is named "thinkpad-acpi".  In some places, like module
+names, "thinkpad_acpi" is used because of userspace issues.
+
+"tpacpi" is used as a shorthand where "thinkpad-acpi" would be too
+long due to length limitations on some Linux kernel versions.
 
 Status
 ------
@@ -571,6 +576,47 @@ netlink interface and the input layer interface, and don't bother at all
 with hotkey_report_mode.
 
 
+Brightness hotkey notes:
+
+These are the current sane choices for brightness key mapping in
+thinkpad-acpi:
+
+For IBM and Lenovo models *without* ACPI backlight control (the ones on
+which thinkpad-acpi will autoload its backlight interface by default,
+and on which ACPI video does not export a backlight interface):
+
+1. Don't enable or map the brightness hotkeys in thinkpad-acpi, as
+   these older firmware versions unfortunately won't respect the hotkey
+   mask for brightness keys anyway, and always reacts to them.  This
+   usually work fine, unless X.org drivers are doing something to block
+   the BIOS.  In that case, use (3) below.  This is the default mode of
+   operation.
+
+2. Enable the hotkeys, but map them to something else that is NOT
+   KEY_BRIGHTNESS_UP/DOWN or any other keycode that would cause
+   userspace to try to change the backlight level, and use that as an
+   on-screen-display hint.
+
+3. IF AND ONLY IF X.org drivers find a way to block the firmware from
+   automatically changing the brightness, enable the hotkeys and map
+   them to KEY_BRIGHTNESS_UP and KEY_BRIGHTNESS_DOWN, and feed that to
+   something that calls xbacklight.  thinkpad-acpi will not be able to
+   change brightness in that case either, so you should disable its
+   backlight interface.
+
+For Lenovo models *with* ACPI backlight control:
+
+1. Load up ACPI video and use that.  ACPI video will report ACPI
+   events for brightness change keys.  Do not mess with thinkpad-acpi
+   defaults in this case.  thinkpad-acpi should not have anything to do
+   with backlight events in a scenario where ACPI video is loaded:
+   brightness hotkeys must be disabled, and the backlight interface is
+   to be kept disabled as well.  This is the default mode of operation.
+
+2. Do *NOT* load up ACPI video, enable the hotkeys in thinkpad-acpi,
+   and map them to KEY_BRIGHTNESS_UP and KEY_BRIGHTNESS_DOWN.  Process
+   these keys on userspace somehow (e.g. by calling xbacklight).
+
 Bluetooth
 ---------
 
@@ -647,16 +693,31 @@ while others are still having problems. For more information:
 
 https://bugs.freedesktop.org/show_bug.cgi?id=2000
 
-ThinkLight control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/light
-------------------------------------------
+ThinkLight control
+------------------
+
+procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/light
+sysfs attributes: as per LED class, for the "tpacpi::thinklight" LED
 
-The current status of the ThinkLight can be found in this file. A few
-models which do not make the status available will show it as
-"unknown". The available commands are:
+procfs notes:
+
+The ThinkLight status can be read and set through the procfs interface.  A
+few models which do not make the status available will show the ThinkLight
+status as "unknown". The available commands are:
 
 	echo on  > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
 	echo off > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
 
+sysfs notes:
+
+The ThinkLight sysfs interface is documented by the LED class
+documentation, in Documentation/leds-class.txt.  The ThinkLight LED name
+is "tpacpi::thinklight".
+
+Due to limitations in the sysfs LED class, if the status of the thinklight
+cannot be read or if it is unknown, thinkpad-acpi will report it as "off".
+It is impossible to know if the status returned through sysfs is valid.
+
 Docking / undocking -- /proc/acpi/ibm/dock
 ------------------------------------------
 
@@ -815,28 +876,63 @@ The cmos command interface is prone to firmware split-brain problems, as
 in newer ThinkPads it is just a compatibility layer.  Do not use it, it is
 exported just as a debug tool.
 
-LED control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/led
----------------------------------
+LED control
+-----------
+
+procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/led
+sysfs attributes: as per LED class, see below for names
+
+Some of the LED indicators can be controlled through this feature.  On
+some older ThinkPad models, it is possible to query the status of the
+LED indicators as well.  Newer ThinkPads cannot query the real status
+of the LED indicators.
 
-Some of the LED indicators can be controlled through this feature. The
-available commands are:
+procfs notes:
+
+The available commands are:
 
-	echo '<led number> on' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
-	echo '<led number> off' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
-	echo '<led number> blink' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
+	echo '<LED number> on' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
+	echo '<LED number> off' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
+	echo '<LED number> blink' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
 
-The <led number> range is 0 to 7. The set of LEDs that can be
-controlled varies from model to model. Here is the mapping on the X40:
+The <LED number> range is 0 to 7. The set of LEDs that can be
+controlled varies from model to model. Here is the common ThinkPad
+mapping:
 
 	0 - power
 	1 - battery (orange)
 	2 - battery (green)
-	3 - UltraBase
+	3 - UltraBase/dock
 	4 - UltraBay
+	5 - UltraBase battery slot
+	6 - (unknown)
 	7 - standby
 
 All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink.
 
+sysfs notes:
+
+The ThinkPad LED sysfs interface is described in detail by the LED class
+documentation, in Documentation/leds-class.txt.
+
+The leds are named (in LED ID order, from 0 to 7):
+"tpacpi::power", "tpacpi:orange:batt", "tpacpi:green:batt",
+"tpacpi::dock_active", "tpacpi::bay_active", "tpacpi::dock_batt",
+"tpacpi::unknown_led", "tpacpi::standby".
+
+Due to limitations in the sysfs LED class, if the status of the LED
+indicators cannot be read due to an error, thinkpad-acpi will report it as
+a brightness of zero (same as LED off).
+
+If the thinkpad firmware doesn't support reading the current status,
+trying to read the current LED brightness will just return whatever
+brightness was last written to that attribute.
+
+These LEDs can blink using hardware acceleration.  To request that a
+ThinkPad indicator LED should blink in hardware accelerated mode, use the
+"timer" trigger, and leave the delay_on and delay_off parameters set to
+zero (to request hardware acceleration autodetection).
+
 ACPI sounds -- /proc/acpi/ibm/beep
 ----------------------------------
 
@@ -1090,6 +1186,15 @@ it there will be the following attributes:
 		dim the display.
 
 
+WARNING:
+
+    Whatever you do, do NOT ever call thinkpad-acpi backlight-level change
+    interface and the ACPI-based backlight level change interface
+    (available on newer BIOSes, and driven by the Linux ACPI video driver)
+    at the same time.  The two will interact in bad ways, do funny things,
+    and maybe reduce the life of the backlight lamps by needlessly kicking
+    its level up and down at every change.
+
 Volume control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/volume
 ---------------------------------------
 

Documentation/leds-class.txt

@@ -19,6 +19,12 @@ optimises away.
 
 Complex triggers whilst available to all LEDs have LED specific
 parameters and work on a per LED basis. The timer trigger is an example.
+The timer trigger will periodically change the LED brightness between
+LED_OFF and the current brightness setting. The "on" and "off" time can
+be specified via /sys/class/leds/<device>/delay_{on,off} in milliseconds.
+You can change the brightness value of a LED independently of the timer
+trigger. However, if you set the brightness value to LED_OFF it will
+also disable the timer trigger.
 
 You can change triggers in a similar manner to the way an IO scheduler
 is chosen (via /sys/class/leds/<device>/trigger). Trigger specific
@@ -63,9 +69,9 @@ value if it is called with *delay_on==0 && *delay_off==0 parameters. In
 this case the driver should give back the chosen value through delay_on
 and delay_off parameters to the leds subsystem.
 
-Any call to the brightness_set() callback function should cancel the
-previously programmed hardware blinking function so setting the brightness
-to 0 can also cancel the blinking of the LED.
+Setting the brightness to zero with brightness_set() callback function
+should completely turn off the LED and cancel the previously programmed
+hardware blinking function, if any.
 
 
 Known Issues

Documentation/magic-number.txt

@@ -95,7 +95,6 @@ RFCOMM_TTY_MAGIC      0x6d02                        net/bluetooth/rfcomm/tty.c
 USB_SERIAL_PORT_MAGIC 0x7301      usb_serial_port   drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h
 CG_MAGIC              0x00090255  ufs_cylinder_group include/linux/ufs_fs.h
 A2232_MAGIC           0x000a2232  gs_port           drivers/char/ser_a2232.h
-SOLARIS_SOCKET_MAGIC  0x000ADDED  sol_socket_struct arch/sparc64/solaris/socksys.h
 RPORT_MAGIC           0x00525001  r_port            drivers/char/rocket_int.h
 LSEMAGIC              0x05091998  lse               drivers/fc4/fc.c
 GDTIOCTL_MAGIC        0x06030f07  gdth_iowr_str     drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h

Documentation/md.txt

@@ -450,3 +450,9 @@ These currently include
       there are upper and lower limits (32768, 16).  Default is 128.
   strip_cache_active (currently raid5 only)
       number of active entries in the stripe cache
+  preread_bypass_threshold (currently raid5 only)
+      number of times a stripe requiring preread will be bypassed by
+      a stripe that does not require preread.  For fairness defaults
+      to 1.  Setting this to 0 disables bypass accounting and
+      requires preread stripes to wait until all full-width stripe-
+      writes are complete.  Valid values are 0 to stripe_cache_size.

Documentation/memory-barriers.txt

@@ -430,8 +430,8 @@ There are certain things that the Linux kernel memory barriers do not guarantee:
 
 	[*] For information on bus mastering DMA and coherency please read:
 
-	    Documentation/pci.txt
-	    Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt
+	    Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
+	    Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt
 	    Documentation/DMA-API.txt
 
 

Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README

@@ -46,8 +46,6 @@ Two files are introduced:
 
   a) 'include/asm-mips/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h'
      containes : struct _auide_hwif
-                 struct drive_list_entry dma_white_list
-                 struct drive_list_entry dma_black_list
                  timing parameters for PIO mode 0/1/2/3/4
                  timing parameters for MWDMA 0/1/2
 
@@ -63,12 +61,6 @@ Four configs variables are introduced:
   CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_SEQTS_PER_RQ - maximum transfer size
                                            per descriptor
 
-If MWDMA is enabled and the connected hard disc is not on the white list, the
-kernel switches to a "safe mwdma mode" at boot time. In this mode the IDE
-performance is substantial slower then in full speed mwdma. In this case
-please add your hard disc to the white list (follow instruction from 'ADD NEW
-HARD DISC TO WHITE OR BLACK LIST' section).
-
 
 SUPPORTED IDE MODES
 -------------------
@@ -120,44 +112,6 @@ CONFIG_IDEDMA_AUTO=y
 Also undefine 'IDE_AU1XXX_BURSTMODE' in 'drivers/ide/mips/au1xxx-ide.c' to
 disable the burst support on DBDMA controller.
 
-ADD NEW HARD DISC TO WHITE OR BLACK LIST
-----------------------------------------
-
-Step 1 : detect the model name of your hard disc
-
-  a) connect your hard disc to the AU1XXX
-
-  b) boot your kernel and get the hard disc model.
-
-     Example boot log:
-
-     --snipped--
-     Uniform Multi-Platform E-IDE driver Revision: 7.00alpha2
-     ide: Assuming 50MHz system bus speed for PIO modes; override with idebus=xx
-     Au1xxx IDE(builtin) configured for MWDMA2
-     Probing IDE interface ide0...
-     hda: Maxtor 6E040L0, ATA DISK drive
-     ide0 at 0xac800000-0xac800007,0xac8001c0 on irq 64
-     hda: max request size: 64KiB
-     hda: 80293248 sectors (41110 MB) w/2048KiB Cache, CHS=65535/16/63, (U)DMA
-     --snipped--
-
-     In this example 'Maxtor 6E040L0'.
-
-Step  2 : edit 'include/asm-mips/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h'
-
-  Add your hard disc to the dma_white_list or dma_black_list structur.
-
-Step 3 : Recompile the kernel
-
-  Enable MWDMA support in the kernel configuration. Recompile the kernel and
-  reboot.
-
-Step 4 : Tests
-
-  If you have add a hard disc to the white list, please run some stress tests
-  for verification.
-
 
 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
 ---------------

Documentation/networking/00-INDEX

@@ -100,8 +100,6 @@ tuntap.txt
 	- TUN/TAP device driver, allowing user space Rx/Tx of packets.
 vortex.txt
 	- info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards.
-wan-router.txt
-	- WAN router documentation
 wavelan.txt
 	- AT&T GIS (nee NCR) WaveLAN card: An Ethernet-like radio transceiver
 x25.txt

Documentation/networking/bcm43xx.txt

@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-
-			BCM43xx Linux Driver Project
-			============================
-
-Introduction
-------------
-
-Many of the wireless devices found in modern notebook computers are
-based on the wireless chips produced by Broadcom. These devices have
-been a problem for Linux users as there is no open-source driver
-available. In addition, Broadcom has not released specifications
-for the device, and driver availability has been limited to the
-binary-only form used in the GPL versions of AP hardware such as the
-Linksys WRT54G, and the Windows and OS X drivers.  Before this project
-began, the only way to use these devices were to use the Windows or
-OS X drivers with either the Linuxant or ndiswrapper modules. There
-is a strong penalty if this method is used as loading the binary-only
-module "taints" the kernel, and no kernel developer will help diagnose
-any kernel problems.
-
-Development
------------
-
-This driver has been developed using
-a clean-room technique that is described at
-http://bcm-specs.sipsolutions.net/ReverseEngineeringProcess. For legal
-reasons, none of the clean-room crew works on the on the Linux driver,
-and none of the Linux developers sees anything but the specifications,
-which are the ultimate product of the reverse-engineering group.
-
-Software
---------
-
-Since the release of the 2.6.17 kernel, the bcm43xx driver has been
-distributed with the kernel source, and is prebuilt in most, if not
-all, distributions.  There is, however, additional software that is
-required. The firmware used by the chip is the intellectual property
-of Broadcom and they have not given the bcm43xx team redistribution
-rights to this firmware.  Since we cannot legally redistribute
-the firmware we cannot include it with the driver. Furthermore, it
-cannot be placed in the downloadable archives of any distributing
-organization; therefore, the user is responsible for obtaining the
-firmware and placing it in the appropriate location so that the driver
-can find it when initializing.
-
-To help with this process, the bcm43xx developers provide a separate
-program named bcm43xx-fwcutter to "cut" the firmware out of a
-Windows or OS X driver and write the extracted files to the proper
-location. This program is usually provided with the distribution;
-however, it may be downloaded from
-
-http://developer.berlios.de/project/showfiles.php?group_id=4547
-
-The firmware is available in two versions. V3 firmware is used with
-the in-kernel bcm43xx driver that uses a software MAC layer called
-SoftMAC, and will have a microcode revision of 0x127 or smaller. The
-V4 firmware is used by an out-of-kernel driver employing a variation of
-the Devicescape MAC layer known as d80211. Once bcm43xx-d80211 reaches
-a satisfactory level of development, it will replace bcm43xx-softmac
-in the kernel as it is much more flexible and powerful.
-
-A source for the latest V3 firmware is
-
-http://downloads.openwrt.org/sources/wl_apsta-3.130.20.0.o
-
-Once this file is downloaded, the command
-'bcm43xx-fwcutter -w <dir> <filename>'
-will extract the microcode and write it to directory
-<dir>. The correct directory will depend on your distribution;
-however, most use '/lib/firmware'. Once this step is completed,
-the bcm3xx driver should load when the system is booted. To see
-any messages relating to the driver, issue the command 'dmesg |
-grep bcm43xx' from a terminal window. If there are any problems,
-please send that output to Bcm43xx-dev@lists.berlios.de.
-
-Although the driver has been in-kernel since 2.6.17, the earliest
-version is quite limited in its capability. Patches that include
-all features of later versions are available for the stable kernel
-versions from 2.6.18. These will be needed if you use a BCM4318,
-or a PCI Express version (BCM4311 and BCM4312). In addition, if you
-have an early BCM4306 and more than 1 GB RAM, your kernel will need
-to be patched.	These patches, which are being updated regularly,
-are available at ftp://lwfinger.dynalias.org/patches. Look for
-combined_2.6.YY.patch. Of course you will need kernel source downloaded
-from kernel.org, or the source from your distribution.
-
-If you build your own kernel, please enable CONFIG_BCM43XX_DEBUG
-and CONFIG_IEEE80211_SOFTMAC_DEBUG. The log information provided is
-essential for solving any problems.

Documentation/networking/phy.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 
 -------
 PHY Abstraction Layer
-(Updated 2006-11-30)
+(Updated 2008-04-08)
 
 Purpose
 
@@ -291,3 +291,39 @@ Writing a PHY driver
  Feel free to look at the Marvell, Cicada, and Davicom drivers in
  drivers/net/phy/ for examples (the lxt and qsemi drivers have
  not been tested as of this writing)
+
+Board Fixups
+
+ Sometimes the specific interaction between the platform and the PHY requires
+ special handling.  For instance, to change where the PHY's clock input is,
+ or to add a delay to account for latency issues in the data path.  In order
+ to support such contingencies, the PHY Layer allows platform code to register
+ fixups to be run when the PHY is brought up (or subsequently reset).
+
+ When the PHY Layer brings up a PHY it checks to see if there are any fixups
+ registered for it, matching based on UID (contained in the PHY device's phy_id
+ field) and the bus identifier (contained in phydev->dev.bus_id).  Both must
+ match, however two constants, PHY_ANY_ID and PHY_ANY_UID, are provided as
+ wildcards for the bus ID and UID, respectively.
+
+ When a match is found, the PHY layer will invoke the run function associated
+ with the fixup.  This function is passed a pointer to the phy_device of
+ interest.  It should therefore only operate on that PHY.
+
+ The platform code can either register the fixup using phy_register_fixup():
+
+	int phy_register_fixup(const char *phy_id,
+		u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask,
+		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
+
+ Or using one of the two stubs, phy_register_fixup_for_uid() and
+ phy_register_fixup_for_id():
+
+ int phy_register_fixup_for_uid(u32 phy_uid, u32 phy_uid_mask,
+		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
+ int phy_register_fixup_for_id(const char *phy_id,
+		int (*run)(struct phy_device *));
+
+ The stubs set one of the two matching criteria, and set the other one to
+ match anything.
+

Documentation/networking/wan-router.txt

@@ -1,621 +0,0 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Linux WAN Router Utilities Package
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Version 2.2.1 
-Mar 28, 2001
-Author: Nenad Corbic <ncorbic@sangoma.com>
-Copyright (c) 1995-2001 Sangoma Technologies Inc.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-INTRODUCTION
-
-Wide Area Networks (WANs) are used to interconnect Local Area Networks (LANs)
-and/or stand-alone hosts over vast distances with data transfer rates
-significantly higher than those achievable with commonly used dial-up
-connections.
-
-Usually an external device called `WAN router' sitting on your local network
-or connected to your machine's serial port provides physical connection to
-WAN.  Although router's job may be as simple as taking your local network
-traffic, converting it to WAN format and piping it through the WAN link, these
-devices are notoriously expensive, with prices as much as 2 - 5 times higher
-then the price of a typical PC box.
-
-Alternatively, considering robustness and multitasking capabilities of Linux,
-an internal router can be built (most routers use some sort of stripped down
-Unix-like operating system anyway). With a number of relatively inexpensive WAN
-interface cards available on the market, a perfectly usable router can be
-built for less than half a price of an external router.  Yet a Linux box
-acting as a router can still be used for other purposes, such as fire-walling,
-running FTP, WWW or DNS server, etc.
-
-This kernel module introduces the notion of a WAN Link Driver (WLD) to Linux
-operating system and provides generic hardware-independent services for such
-drivers.  Why can existing Linux network device interface not be used for
-this purpose?  Well, it can.  However, there are a few key differences between
-a typical network interface (e.g. Ethernet) and a WAN link.
-
-Many WAN protocols, such as X.25 and frame relay, allow for multiple logical
-connections (known as `virtual circuits' in X.25 terminology) over a single
-physical link.  Each such virtual circuit may (and almost always does) lead
-to a different geographical location and, therefore, different network.  As a
-result, it is the virtual circuit, not the physical link, that represents a
-route and, therefore, a network interface in Linux terms.
-
-To further complicate things, virtual circuits are usually volatile in nature
-(excluding so called `permanent' virtual circuits or PVCs).  With almost no
-time required to set up and tear down a virtual circuit, it is highly desirable
-to implement on-demand connections in order to minimize network charges.  So
-unlike a typical network driver, the WAN driver must be able to handle multiple
-network interfaces and cope as multiple virtual circuits come into existence
-and go away dynamically.
- 
-Last, but not least, WAN configuration is much more complex than that of say
-Ethernet and may well amount to several dozens of parameters.  Some of them
-are "link-wide"  while others are virtual circuit-specific.  The same holds
-true for WAN statistics which is by far more extensive and extremely useful
-when troubleshooting WAN connections.  Extending the ifconfig utility to suit
-these needs may be possible, but does not seem quite reasonable.  Therefore, a
-WAN configuration utility and corresponding application programmer's interface
-is needed for this purpose.
-
-Most of these problems are taken care of by this module.  Its goal is to
-provide a user with more-or-less standard look and feel for all WAN devices and
-assist a WAN device driver writer by providing common services, such as:
-
- o User-level interface via /proc file system
- o Centralized configuration
- o Device management (setup, shutdown, etc.)
- o Network interface management (dynamic creation/destruction)
- o Protocol encapsulation/decapsulation
-
-To ba able to use the Linux WAN Router you will also need a WAN Tools package
-available from
-
-	ftp.sangoma.com/pub/linux/current_wanpipe/wanpipe-X.Y.Z.tgz
-
-where vX.Y.Z represent the wanpipe version number.
-
-For technical questions and/or comments please e-mail to ncorbic@sangoma.com.
-For general inquiries please contact Sangoma Technologies Inc. by
-
-	Hotline:	1-800-388-2475	(USA and Canada, toll free)
-	Phone:		(905) 474-1990  ext: 106
-	Fax:		(905) 474-9223
-	E-mail:		dm@sangoma.com	(David Mandelstam)
-	WWW:		http://www.sangoma.com
-
-
-INSTALLATION
-
-Please read the WanpipeForLinux.pdf manual on how to 
-install the WANPIPE tools and drivers properly. 
-
-
-After installing wanpipe package: /usr/local/wanrouter/doc. 
-On the ftp.sangoma.com : /linux/current_wanpipe/doc
-
-
-COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING INFORMATION
-
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
-the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
-Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
-ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
-FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
-this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass
-Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
-
-
-ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
-
-This product is based on the WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Router developed
-by Sangoma Technologies Inc. for Linux 2.0.x and 2.2.x.  Success of the WANPIPE
-together with the next major release of Linux kernel in summer 1996 commanded
-adequate changes to the WANPIPE code to take full advantage of new Linux
-features.
-
-Instead of continuing developing proprietary interface tied to Sangoma WAN
-cards, we decided to separate all hardware-independent code into a separate
-module and defined two levels of interfaces - one for user-level applications
-and another for kernel-level WAN drivers.  WANPIPE is now implemented as a
-WAN driver compliant with the WAN Link Driver interface.  Also a general
-purpose WAN configuration utility and a set of shell scripts was developed to 
-support WAN router at the user level.
-
-Many useful ideas concerning hardware-independent interface implementation
-were given by Mike McLagan <mike.mclagan@linux.org> and his implementation
-of the Frame Relay router and drivers for Sangoma cards (dlci/sdla).
-
-With the new implementation of the APIs being incorporated into the WANPIPE,
-a special thank goes to Alan Cox in providing insight into BSD sockets.
-
-Special thanks to all the WANPIPE users who performed field-testing, reported
-bugs and made valuable comments and suggestions that help us to improve this
-product.
-
-
-
-NEW IN THIS RELEASE
-
-	o Updated the WANCFG utility
-		Calls the pppconfig to configure the PPPD
-		for async connections.
-
-	o Added the PPPCONFIG utility
-		Used to configure the PPPD daemon for the
-		WANPIPE Async PPP and standard serial port.
-		The wancfg calls the pppconfig to configure
-		the pppd.
-
-	o Fixed the PCI autodetect feature.  
-		The SLOT 0 was used as an autodetect option
-		however, some high end PC's slot numbers start
-		from 0. 
-
-	o This release has been tested with the new backupd
-	  daemon release.
-	
-
-PRODUCT COMPONENTS AND RELATED FILES
-
-/etc: (or user defined)
-	wanpipe1.conf	default router configuration file
-
-/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/misc:
-	wanrouter.o	router kernel loadable module
-	af_wanpipe.o	wanpipe api socket module
-
-/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/net:
-	sdladrv.o	Sangoma SDLA support module
-	wanpipe.o	Sangoma WANPIPE(tm) driver module
-
-/proc/net/wanrouter
-	Config		reads current router configuration
-	Status		reads current router status
-	{name}		reads WAN driver statistics
-
-/usr/sbin:
-	wanrouter	wanrouter start-up script
-	wanconfig	wanrouter configuration utility
-	sdladump	WANPIPE adapter memory dump utility
-        fpipemon        Monitor for Frame Relay
-        cpipemon        Monitor for Cisco HDLC
-	ppipemon 	Monitor for PPP
-	xpipemon 	Monitor for X25
-	wpkbdmon        WANPIPE keyboard led monitor/debugger
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter:
-	README		this file
-	COPYING		GNU General Public License
-	Setup		installation script
-	Filelist	distribution definition file
-	wanrouter.rc	meta-configuration file 
-			(used by the Setup and wanrouter script)
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/doc:
-	wanpipeForLinux.pdf 	WAN Router User's Manual
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/patches:
-	wanrouter-v2213.gz  	patch for Linux kernels 2.2.11 up to 2.2.13.
-	wanrouter-v2214.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.2.14. 
-	wanrouter-v2215.gz	patch for Linux kernels 2.2.15 to 2.2.17.
-	wanrouter-v2218.gz	patch for Linux kernels 2.2.18 and up.
-	wanrouter-v240.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.4.0.  
-	wanrouter-v242.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.4.2 and up.
-	wanrouter-v2034.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.0.34
-	wanrouter-v2036.gz 	patch for Linux kernel 2.0.36 and up. 
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/patches/kdrivers:
-	Sources of the latest WANPIPE device drivers.
-	These are used to UPGRADE the linux kernel to the newest
-	version if the kernel source has already been patched with
-	WANPIPE drivers.
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/samples:
-	interface	sample interface configuration file
-	wanpipe1.cpri 	CHDLC primary port
-     	wanpipe2.csec 	CHDLC secondary port
-     	wanpipe1.fr   	Frame Relay protocol
-     	wanpipe1.ppp  	PPP protocol ) 
-	wanpipe1.asy	CHDLC ASYNC protocol
-	wanpipe1.x25	X25 protocol
-	wanpipe1.stty	Sync TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon)
-	wanpipe1.atty	Async TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon)
-	wanrouter.rc	sample meta-configuration file
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/util:
-	*		wan-tools utilities source code
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/api/x25:
-	*		x25 api sample programs.
-/usr/local/wanrouter/api/chdlc:
-	*		chdlc api sample programs.
-/usr/local/wanrouter/api/fr:
-	*		fr api sample programs.
-/usr/local/wanrouter/config/wancfg:
-	wancfg		WANPIPE GUI configuration program.
-                        Creates wanpipe#.conf files. 
-/usr/local/wanrouter/config/cfgft1:
-	cfgft1		GUI CSU/DSU configuration program.
-
-/usr/include/linux:
-	wanrouter.h	router API definitions
-	wanpipe.h	WANPIPE API definitions
-	sdladrv.h	SDLA support module API definitions
-	sdlasfm.h	SDLA firmware module definitions
-	if_wanpipe.h	WANPIPE Socket definitions
-	sdlapci.h	WANPIPE PCI definitions
-	
-
-/usr/src/linux/net/wanrouter:
-	*		wanrouter source code
-
-/var/log:
-	wanrouter	wanrouter start-up log (created by the Setup script)
-
-/var/lock:  (or /var/lock/subsys for RedHat)
-	wanrouter	wanrouter lock file (created by the Setup script)
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/firmware:
-	fr514.sfm	Frame relay firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card
-	cdual514.sfm	Dual Port Cisco HDLC firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card
-	ppp514.sfm      PPP Firmware for Sangoma S508 and S514 cards
-	x25_508.sfm	X25 Firmware for Sangoma S508 card.
-
-
-REVISION HISTORY
-
-1.0.0	December 31, 1996	Initial version
-
-1.0.1	January 30, 1997	Status and statistics can be read via /proc
-				filesystem entries.
-
-1.0.2   April 30, 1997          Added UDP management via monitors.
-
-1.0.3	June 3, 1997		UDP management for multiple boards using Frame
-				Relay and PPP
-				Enabled continuous transmission of Configure 
-				Request Packet for PPP (for 508 only)
-				Connection Timeout for PPP changed from 900 to 0
-				Flow Control Problem fixed for Frame Relay
-
-1.0.4	July 10, 1997		S508/FT1 monitoring capability in fpipemon and
-				ppipemon utilities.
-				Configurable TTL for UDP packets.
-				Multicast and Broadcast IP source addresses are
-				silently discarded.
-
-1.0.5	July 28, 1997		Configurable T391,T392,N391,N392,N393 for Frame
-				Relay in router.conf.
-				Configurable Memory Address through router.conf 
-				for Frame Relay, PPP and X.25. (commenting this
- 				out enables auto-detection).
-				Fixed freeing up received buffers using kfree()
- 				for Frame Relay and X.25.
-				Protect sdla_peek() by calling save_flags(),
-				cli() and restore_flags().
-				Changed number of Trace elements from 32 to 20
-				Added DLCI specific data monitoring in FPIPEMON. 
-2.0.0	Nov 07, 1997		Implemented protection of RACE conditions by 
-				critical flags for FRAME RELAY and PPP.
-				DLCI List interrupt mode implemented.
-				IPX support in FRAME RELAY and PPP.
-				IPX Server Support (MARS)
-				More driver specific stats included in FPIPEMON
-				and PIPEMON.
-
-2.0.1	Nov 28, 1997		Bug Fixes for version 2.0.0.
-				Protection of "enable_irq()" while 
-				"disable_irq()" has been enabled from any other
-				routine (for Frame Relay, PPP and X25).
-				Added additional Stats for Fpipemon and Ppipemon
-				Improved Load Sharing for multiple boards
-
-2.0.2	Dec 09, 1997		Support for PAP and CHAP for ppp has been
-				implemented.
-
-2.0.3	Aug 15, 1998		New release supporting Cisco HDLC, CIR for Frame
-				relay, Dynamic IP assignment for PPP and Inverse
-				Arp support for Frame-relay.  Man Pages are 
-				included for better support and a new utility
-				for configuring FT1 cards.
-
-2.0.4	Dec 09, 1998	        Dual Port support for Cisco HDLC.
-				Support for HDLC (LAPB) API.
-				Supports BiSync Streaming code for S502E 
-				and S503 cards.
-				Support for Streaming HDLC API.
-				Provides a BSD socket interface for 
-				creating applications using BiSync
-   				streaming.        
-
-2.0.5   Aug 04, 1999 		CHDLC initialization bug fix.
-				PPP interrupt driven driver: 
-  				Fix to the PPP line hangup problem.
-				New PPP firmware
-				Added comments to the startup SYSTEM ERROR messages
-				Xpipemon debugging application for the X25 protocol
-				New USER_MANUAL.txt
-				Fixed the odd boundary 4byte writes to the board.
-				BiSync Streaming code has been taken out.  
-				 Available as a patch.
-				Streaming HDLC API has been taken out.  
-				 Available as a patch.                 
-
-2.0.6   Aug 17, 1999		Increased debugging in statup scripts
-				Fixed installation bugs from 2.0.5
-				Kernel patch works for both 2.2.10 and 2.2.11 kernels.
-				There is no functional difference between the two packages         
-
-2.0.7   Aug 26, 1999		o  Merged X25API code into WANPIPE.
-				o  Fixed a memory leak for X25API
-				o  Updated the X25API code for 2.2.X kernels.
-				o  Improved NEM handling.   
-
-2.1.0	Oct 25, 1999		o New code for S514 PCI Card
-				o New CHDLC and Frame Relay drivers
-				o PPP and X25 are not supported in this release    
-
-2.1.1	Nov 30, 1999		o PPP support for S514 PCI Cards
-
-2.1.3   Apr 06, 2000		o Socket based x25api 
-				o Socket based chdlc api
-				o Socket based fr api
-				o Dual Port Receive only CHDLC support.
-				o Asynchronous CHDLC support (Secondary Port)
-				o cfgft1 GUI csu/dsu configurator
-				o wancfg GUI configuration file 
-				  configurator.
-				o Architectural directory changes.
-
-beta-2.1.4 Jul 2000		o Dynamic interface configuration:
-					Network interfaces reflect the state
-					of protocol layer.  If the protocol becomes
-					disconnected, driver will bring down
-					the interface.  Once the protocol reconnects
-					the interface will be brought up. 
-					
-					Note: This option is turned off by default.
-
-				o Dynamic wanrouter setup using 'wanconfig':
-					wanconfig utility can be used to
-					shutdown,restart,start or reconfigure 
-					a virtual circuit dynamically.
-				     
-					Frame Relay:  Each DLCI can be: 
-						      created,stopped,restarted and reconfigured
-						      dynamically using wanconfig.
-					
-						      ex: wanconfig card wanpipe1 dev wp1_fr16 up
-				  
-				o Wanrouter startup via command line arguments:
-					wanconfig also supports wanrouter startup via command line
-					arguments.  Thus, there is no need to create a wanpipe#.conf
-					configuration file.  
-
-				o Socket based x25api update/bug fixes.
-					Added support for LCN numbers greater than 255.
-					Option to pass up modem messages.
-					Provided a PCI IRQ check, so a single S514
-					card is guaranteed to have a non-sharing interrupt.
-
-				o Fixes to the wancfg utility.
-				o New FT1 debugging support via *pipemon utilities.
-				o Frame Relay ARP support Enabled.
-
-beta3-2.1.4 Jul 2000		o X25 M_BIT Problem fix.
-				o Added the Multi-Port PPP
-				  Updated utilities for the Multi-Port PPP.
-
-2.1.4	Aut 2000
-				o In X25API:
-					Maximum packet an application can send
-					to the driver has been extended to 4096 bytes.
-
-					Fixed the x25 startup bug. Enable 
-					communications only after all interfaces
-					come up.  HIGH SVC/PVC is used to calculate
-					the number of channels.
-					Enable protocol only after all interfaces
-					are enabled.
-
-				o Added an extra state to the FT1 config, kernel module.
-				o Updated the pipemon debuggers.
-
-				o Blocked the Multi-Port PPP from running on kernels
-				  2.2.16 or greater, due to syncppp kernel module
-				  change. 
-	  
-beta1-2.1.5 	Nov 15 2000
-				o Fixed the MultiPort PPP Support for kernels 2.2.16 and above.
-				  2.2.X kernels only
-
-				o Secured the driver UDP debugging calls
-					- All illegal network debugging calls are reported to
-					  the log.
-					- Defined a set of allowed commands, all other denied.
-					
-				o Cpipemon
-					- Added set FT1 commands to the cpipemon. Thus CSU/DSU
-					  configuration can be performed using cpipemon.
-					  All systems that cannot run cfgft1 GUI utility should
-					  use cpipemon to configure the on board CSU/DSU.
-
-
-				o Keyboard Led Monitor/Debugger
-					- A new utility /usr/sbin/wpkbdmon uses keyboard leds
-					  to convey operational statistic information of the 
-					  Sangoma WANPIPE cards.
-					NUM_LOCK    = Line State  (On=connected,    Off=disconnected)
-					CAPS_LOCK   = Tx data     (On=transmitting, Off=no tx data)
-					SCROLL_LOCK = Rx data     (On=receiving,    Off=no rx data
-					
-				o Hardware probe on module load and dynamic device allocation
-					- During WANPIPE module load, all Sangoma cards are probed
-					  and found information is printed in the /var/log/messages.
-					- If no cards are found, the module load fails.
-					- Appropriate number of devices are dynamically loaded 
-					  based on the number of Sangoma cards found.
-
-					  Note: The kernel configuration option 
-						CONFIG_WANPIPE_CARDS has been taken out.
-					
-				o Fixed the Frame Relay and Chdlc network interfaces so they are
-				  compatible with libpcap libraries.  Meaning, tcpdump, snort,
-				  ethereal, and all other packet sniffers and debuggers work on
-				  all WANPIPE network interfaces.
-					- Set the network interface encoding type to ARPHRD_PPP.
-					  This tell the sniffers that data obtained from the
-					  network interface is in pure IP format.
-				  Fix for 2.2.X kernels only.
-				
-				o True interface encoding option for Frame Relay and CHDLC
-					- The above fix sets the network interface encoding
-					  type to ARPHRD_PPP, however some customers use
-					  the encoding interface type to determine the
-					  protocol running.  Therefore, the TURE ENCODING
-					  option will set the interface type back to the
-					  original value.  
-
-					  NOTE: If this option is used with Frame Relay and CHDLC
-						libpcap library support will be broken.  
-						i.e. tcpdump will not work.
-					Fix for 2.2.x Kernels only.
-						
-				o Ethernet Bridgind over Frame Relay
-					- The Frame Relay bridging has been developed by 
-					  Kristian Hoffmann and Mark Wells.  
-					- The Linux kernel bridge is used to send ethernet 
-					  data over the frame relay links.
-					For 2.2.X Kernels only.
-
-				o Added extensive 2.0.X support. Most new features of
-				  2.1.5 for protocols Frame Relay, PPP and CHDLC are
-				  supported under 2.0.X kernels. 
-
-beta1-2.2.0 	Dec 30 2000
-				o Updated drivers for 2.4.X kernels.
-				o Updated drivers for SMP support.
-				o X25API is now able to share PCI interrupts.
-				o Took out a general polling routine that was used
-				  only by X25API. 
-				o Added appropriate locks to the dynamic reconfiguration
-				  code.
-				o Fixed a bug in the keyboard debug monitor.
-
-beta2-2.2.0	Jan 8 2001
-				o Patches for 2.4.0 kernel
-				o Patches for 2.2.18 kernel
-				o Minor updates to PPP and CHLDC drivers.
-				  Note: No functional difference.
-
-beta3-2.2.9	Jan 10 2001
-				o I missed the 2.2.18 kernel patches in beta2-2.2.0
-				  release.  They are included in this release.
-
-Stable Release
-2.2.0		Feb 01 2001
-				o Bug fix in wancfg GUI configurator.
-					The edit function didn't work properly.
-
-
-bata1-2.2.1	Feb 09 2001
-			o WANPIPE TTY Driver emulation. 
-			  Two modes of operation Sync and Async.
-				Sync: Using the PPPD daemon, kernel SyncPPP layer
-				      and the Wanpipe sync TTY driver: a PPP protocol 
-				      connection can be established via Sangoma adapter, over
-				      a T1 leased line.
-			
-				      The 2.4.0 kernel PPP layer supports MULTILINK
-				      protocol, that can be used to bundle any number of Sangoma
-				      adapters (T1 lines) into one, under a single IP address.
-				      Thus, efficiently obtaining multiple T1 throughput. 
-
-				      NOTE: The remote side must also implement MULTILINK PPP
-					    protocol.
-
-				Async:Using the PPPD daemon, kernel AsyncPPP layer
-				      and the WANPIPE async TTY driver: a PPP protocol
-				      connection can be established via Sangoma adapter and
-				      a modem, over a telephone line.
-
-				      Thus, the WANPIPE async TTY driver simulates a serial
-				      TTY driver that would normally be used to interface the 
-				      MODEM to the linux kernel.
-				
-			o WANPIPE PPP Backup Utility
-				This utility will monitor the state of the PPP T1 line.
-				In case of failure, a dial up connection will be established
-				via pppd daemon, ether via a serial tty driver (serial port), 
-				or a WANPIPE async TTY driver (in case serial port is unavailable).
-				
-				Furthermore, while in dial up mode, the primary PPP T1 link
-				will be monitored for signs of life.  
-
-				If the PPP T1 link comes back to life, the dial up connection
-				will be shutdown and T1 line re-established.
-			
-
-			o New Setup installation script.
-				Option to UPGRADE device drivers if the kernel source has
-				already been patched with WANPIPE.
-
-				Option to COMPILE WANPIPE modules against the currently 
-				running kernel, thus no need for manual kernel and module
-				re-compilation.
-			
-			o Updates and Bug Fixes to wancfg utility.
-
-bata2-2.2.1	Feb 20 2001
-
-			o Bug fixes to the CHDLC device drivers.
-				The driver had compilation problems under kernels
-				2.2.14 or lower.
-
-			o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script.
-				The device drivers compilation options didn't work
-				properly.
-
-			o Update to the wpbackupd daemon.  
-				Optimized the cross-over times, between the primary
-				link and the backup dialup.
-
-beta3-2.2.1	Mar 02 2001
-			o Patches for 2.4.2 kernel.
-
-			o Bug fixes to util/ make files.
-			o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script.
-
-			o Took out the backupd support and made it into
-			  as separate package.
-			  
-beta4-2.2.1     Mar 12 2001
-
-		o Fix to the Frame Relay Device driver.
-			IPSAC sends a packet of zero length
-			header to the frame relay driver.  The
-			driver tries to push its own 2 byte header
-			into the packet, which causes the driver to
-			crash.
-
-		o Fix the WANPIPE re-configuration code.
-			Bug was found by trying to run  the cfgft1 while the
-			interface was already running.  
-
-		o Updates to cfgft1.
-			Writes a wanpipe#.cfgft1 configuration file
-			once the CSU/DSU is configured. This file can
-			holds the current CSU/DSU configuration.
-
-
-
->>>>>> END OF README <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-
-

Documentation/pci.txt

@@ -1,646 +0,0 @@
-
-			How To Write Linux PCI Drivers
-
-		by Martin Mares <mj@ucw.cz> on 07-Feb-2000
-	updated by Grant Grundler <grundler@parisc-linux.org> on 23-Dec-2006
-
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The world of PCI is vast and full of (mostly unpleasant) surprises.
-Since each CPU architecture implements different chip-sets and PCI devices
-have different requirements (erm, "features"), the result is the PCI support
-in the Linux kernel is not as trivial as one would wish. This short paper
-tries to introduce all potential driver authors to Linux APIs for
-PCI device drivers.
-
-A more complete resource is the third edition of "Linux Device Drivers"
-by Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman.
-LDD3 is available for free (under Creative Commons License) from:
-
-	http://lwn.net/Kernel/LDD3/
-
-However, keep in mind that all documents are subject to "bit rot".
-Refer to the source code if things are not working as described here.
-
-Please send questions/comments/patches about Linux PCI API to the
-"Linux PCI" <linux-pci@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz> mailing list.
-
-
-
-0. Structure of PCI drivers
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-PCI drivers "discover" PCI devices in a system via pci_register_driver().
-Actually, it's the other way around. When the PCI generic code discovers
-a new device, the driver with a matching "description" will be notified.
-Details on this below.
-
-pci_register_driver() leaves most of the probing for devices to
-the PCI layer and supports online insertion/removal of devices [thus
-supporting hot-pluggable PCI, CardBus, and Express-Card in a single driver].
-pci_register_driver() call requires passing in a table of function
-pointers and thus dictates the high level structure of a driver.
-
-Once the driver knows about a PCI device and takes ownership, the
-driver generally needs to perform the following initialization:
-
-	Enable the device
-	Request MMIO/IOP resources
-	Set the DMA mask size (for both coherent and streaming DMA)
-	Allocate and initialize shared control data (pci_allocate_coherent())
-	Access device configuration space (if needed)
-	Register IRQ handler (request_irq())
-	Initialize non-PCI (i.e. LAN/SCSI/etc parts of the chip)
-	Enable DMA/processing engines
-
-When done using the device, and perhaps the module needs to be unloaded,
-the driver needs to take the follow steps:
-	Disable the device from generating IRQs
-	Release the IRQ (free_irq())
-	Stop all DMA activity
-	Release DMA buffers (both streaming and coherent)
-	Unregister from other subsystems (e.g. scsi or netdev)
-	Release MMIO/IOP resources
-	Disable the device
-
-Most of these topics are covered in the following sections.
-For the rest look at LDD3 or <linux/pci.h> .
-
-If the PCI subsystem is not configured (CONFIG_PCI is not set), most of
-the PCI functions described below are defined as inline functions either
-completely empty or just returning an appropriate error codes to avoid
-lots of ifdefs in the drivers.
-
-
-
-1. pci_register_driver() call
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-PCI device drivers call pci_register_driver() during their
-initialization with a pointer to a structure describing the driver
-(struct pci_driver):
-
-	field name	Description
-	----------	------------------------------------------------------
-	id_table	Pointer to table of device ID's the driver is
-			interested in.  Most drivers should export this
-			table using MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(pci,...).
-
-	probe		This probing function gets called (during execution
-			of pci_register_driver() for already existing
-			devices or later if a new device gets inserted) for
-			all PCI devices which match the ID table and are not
-			"owned" by the other drivers yet. This function gets
-			passed a "struct pci_dev *" for each device whose
-			entry in the ID table matches the device. The probe
-			function returns zero when the driver chooses to
-			take "ownership" of the device or an error code
-			(negative number) otherwise.
-			The probe function always gets called from process
-			context, so it can sleep.
-
-	remove		The remove() function gets called whenever a device
-			being handled by this driver is removed (either during
-			deregistration of the driver or when it's manually
-			pulled out of a hot-pluggable slot).
-			The remove function always gets called from process
-			context, so it can sleep.
-
-	suspend		Put device into low power state.
-	suspend_late	Put device into low power state.
-
-	resume_early	Wake device from low power state.
-	resume		Wake device from low power state.
-
-		(Please see Documentation/power/pci.txt for descriptions
-		of PCI Power Management and the related functions.)
-
-	shutdown	Hook into reboot_notifier_list (kernel/sys.c).
-			Intended to stop any idling DMA operations.
-			Useful for enabling wake-on-lan (NIC) or changing
-			the power state of a device before reboot.
-			e.g. drivers/net/e100.c.
-
-	err_handler	See Documentation/pci-error-recovery.txt
-
-
-The ID table is an array of struct pci_device_id entries ending with an
-all-zero entry; use of the macro DEFINE_PCI_DEVICE_TABLE is the preferred
-method of declaring the table.  Each entry consists of:
-
-	vendor,device	Vendor and device ID to match (or PCI_ANY_ID)
-
-	subvendor,	Subsystem vendor and device ID to match (or PCI_ANY_ID)
-	subdevice,
-
-	class		Device class, subclass, and "interface" to match.
-			See Appendix D of the PCI Local Bus Spec or
-			include/linux/pci_ids.h for a full list of classes.
-			Most drivers do not need to specify class/class_mask
-			as vendor/device is normally sufficient.
-
-	class_mask	limit which sub-fields of the class field are compared.
-			See drivers/scsi/sym53c8xx_2/ for example of usage.
-
-	driver_data	Data private to the driver.
-			Most drivers don't need to use driver_data field.
-			Best practice is to use driver_data as an index
-			into a static list of equivalent device types,
-			instead of using it as a pointer.
-
-
-Most drivers only need PCI_DEVICE() or PCI_DEVICE_CLASS() to set up
-a pci_device_id table.
-
-New PCI IDs may be added to a device driver pci_ids table at runtime
-as shown below:
-
-echo "vendor device subvendor subdevice class class_mask driver_data" > \
-/sys/bus/pci/drivers/{driver}/new_id
-
-All fields are passed in as hexadecimal values (no leading 0x).
-The vendor and device fields are mandatory, the others are optional. Users
-need pass only as many optional fields as necessary:
-	o subvendor and subdevice fields default to PCI_ANY_ID (FFFFFFFF)
-	o class and classmask fields default to 0
-	o driver_data defaults to 0UL.
-
-Once added, the driver probe routine will be invoked for any unclaimed
-PCI devices listed in its (newly updated) pci_ids list.
-
-When the driver exits, it just calls pci_unregister_driver() and the PCI layer
-automatically calls the remove hook for all devices handled by the driver.
-
-
-1.1 "Attributes" for driver functions/data
-
-Please mark the initialization and cleanup functions where appropriate
-(the corresponding macros are defined in <linux/init.h>):
-
-	__init		Initialization code. Thrown away after the driver
-			initializes.
-	__exit		Exit code. Ignored for non-modular drivers.
-
-
-	__devinit	Device initialization code.
-			Identical to __init if the kernel is not compiled
-			with CONFIG_HOTPLUG, normal function otherwise.
-	__devexit	The same for __exit.
-
-Tips on when/where to use the above attributes:
-	o The module_init()/module_exit() functions (and all
-	  initialization functions called _only_ from these)
-	  should be marked __init/__exit.
-
-	o Do not mark the struct pci_driver.
-
-	o The ID table array should be marked __devinitconst; this is done
-	  automatically if the table is declared with DEFINE_PCI_DEVICE_TABLE().
-
-	o The probe() and remove() functions should be marked __devinit
-	  and __devexit respectively.  All initialization functions
-	  exclusively called by the probe() routine, can be marked __devinit.
-	  Ditto for remove() and __devexit.
-
-	o If mydriver_remove() is marked with __devexit(), then all address
-	  references to mydriver_remove must use __devexit_p(mydriver_remove)
-	  (in the struct pci_driver declaration for example).
-	  __devexit_p() will generate the function name _or_ NULL if the
-	  function will be discarded.  For an example, see drivers/net/tg3.c.
-
-	o Do NOT mark a function if you are not sure which mark to use.
-	  Better to not mark the function than mark the function wrong.
-
-
-
-2. How to find PCI devices manually
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-PCI drivers should have a really good reason for not using the
-pci_register_driver() interface to search for PCI devices.
-The main reason PCI devices are controlled by multiple drivers
-is because one PCI device implements several different HW services.
-E.g. combined serial/parallel port/floppy controller.
-
-A manual search may be performed using the following constructs:
-
-Searching by vendor and device ID:
-
-	struct pci_dev *dev = NULL;
-	while (dev = pci_get_device(VENDOR_ID, DEVICE_ID, dev))
-		configure_device(dev);
-
-Searching by class ID (iterate in a similar way):
-
-	pci_get_class(CLASS_ID, dev)
-
-Searching by both vendor/device and subsystem vendor/device ID:
-
-	pci_get_subsys(VENDOR_ID,DEVICE_ID, SUBSYS_VENDOR_ID, SUBSYS_DEVICE_ID, dev).
-
-You can use the constant PCI_ANY_ID as a wildcard replacement for
-VENDOR_ID or DEVICE_ID.  This allows searching for any device from a
-specific vendor, for example.
-
-These functions are hotplug-safe. They increment the reference count on
-the pci_dev that they return. You must eventually (possibly at module unload)
-decrement the reference count on these devices by calling pci_dev_put().
-
-
-
-3. Device Initialization Steps
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-As noted in the introduction, most PCI drivers need the following steps
-for device initialization:
-
-	Enable the device
-	Request MMIO/IOP resources
-	Set the DMA mask size (for both coherent and streaming DMA)
-	Allocate and initialize shared control data (pci_allocate_coherent())
-	Access device configuration space (if needed)
-	Register IRQ handler (request_irq())
-	Initialize non-PCI (i.e. LAN/SCSI/etc parts of the chip)
-	Enable DMA/processing engines.
-
-The driver can access PCI config space registers at any time.
-(Well, almost. When running BIST, config space can go away...but
-that will just result in a PCI Bus Master Abort and config reads
-will return garbage).
-
-
-3.1 Enable the PCI device
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Before touching any device registers, the driver needs to enable
-the PCI device by calling pci_enable_device(). This will:
-	o wake up the device if it was in suspended state,
-	o allocate I/O and memory regions of the device (if BIOS did not),
-	o allocate an IRQ (if BIOS did not).
-
-NOTE: pci_enable_device() can fail! Check the return value.
-
-[ OS BUG: we don't check resource allocations before enabling those
-  resources. The sequence would make more sense if we called
-  pci_request_resources() before calling pci_enable_device().
-  Currently, the device drivers can't detect the bug when when two
-  devices have been allocated the same range. This is not a common
-  problem and unlikely to get fixed soon.
-
-  This has been discussed before but not changed as of 2.6.19:
-	http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/3/2/194
-]
-
-pci_set_master() will enable DMA by setting the bus master bit
-in the PCI_COMMAND register. It also fixes the latency timer value if
-it's set to something bogus by the BIOS.
-
-If the PCI device can use the PCI Memory-Write-Invalidate transaction,
-call pci_set_mwi().  This enables the PCI_COMMAND bit for Mem-Wr-Inval
-and also ensures that the cache line size register is set correctly.
-Check the return value of pci_set_mwi() as not all architectures
-or chip-sets may support Memory-Write-Invalidate.  Alternatively,
-if Mem-Wr-Inval would be nice to have but is not required, call
-pci_try_set_mwi() to have the system do its best effort at enabling
-Mem-Wr-Inval.
-
-
-3.2 Request MMIO/IOP resources
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Memory (MMIO), and I/O port addresses should NOT be read directly
-from the PCI device config space. Use the values in the pci_dev structure
-as the PCI "bus address" might have been remapped to a "host physical"
-address by the arch/chip-set specific kernel support.
-
-See Documentation/IO-mapping.txt for how to access device registers
-or device memory.
-
-The device driver needs to call pci_request_region() to verify
-no other device is already using the same address resource.
-Conversely, drivers should call pci_release_region() AFTER
-calling pci_disable_device().
-The idea is to prevent two devices colliding on the same address range.
-
-[ See OS BUG comment above. Currently (2.6.19), The driver can only
-  determine MMIO and IO Port resource availability _after_ calling
-  pci_enable_device(). ]
-
-Generic flavors of pci_request_region() are request_mem_region()
-(for MMIO ranges) and request_region() (for IO Port ranges).
-Use these for address resources that are not described by "normal" PCI
-BARs.
-
-Also see pci_request_selected_regions() below.
-
-
-3.3 Set the DMA mask size
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-[ If anything below doesn't make sense, please refer to
-  Documentation/DMA-API.txt. This section is just a reminder that
-  drivers need to indicate DMA capabilities of the device and is not
-  an authoritative source for DMA interfaces. ]
-
-While all drivers should explicitly indicate the DMA capability
-(e.g. 32 or 64 bit) of the PCI bus master, devices with more than
-32-bit bus master capability for streaming data need the driver
-to "register" this capability by calling pci_set_dma_mask() with
-appropriate parameters.  In general this allows more efficient DMA
-on systems where System RAM exists above 4G _physical_ address.
-
-Drivers for all PCI-X and PCIe compliant devices must call
-pci_set_dma_mask() as they are 64-bit DMA devices.
-
-Similarly, drivers must also "register" this capability if the device
-can directly address "consistent memory" in System RAM above 4G physical
-address by calling pci_set_consistent_dma_mask().
-Again, this includes drivers for all PCI-X and PCIe compliant devices.
-Many 64-bit "PCI" devices (before PCI-X) and some PCI-X devices are
-64-bit DMA capable for payload ("streaming") data but not control
-("consistent") data.
-
-
-3.4 Setup shared control data
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Once the DMA masks are set, the driver can allocate "consistent" (a.k.a. shared)
-memory.  See Documentation/DMA-API.txt for a full description of
-the DMA APIs. This section is just a reminder that it needs to be done
-before enabling DMA on the device.
-
-
-3.5 Initialize device registers
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Some drivers will need specific "capability" fields programmed
-or other "vendor specific" register initialized or reset.
-E.g. clearing pending interrupts.
-
-
-3.6 Register IRQ handler
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-While calling request_irq() is the last step described here,
-this is often just another intermediate step to initialize a device.
-This step can often be deferred until the device is opened for use.
-
-All interrupt handlers for IRQ lines should be registered with IRQF_SHARED
-and use the devid to map IRQs to devices (remember that all PCI IRQ lines
-can be shared).
-
-request_irq() will associate an interrupt handler and device handle
-with an interrupt number. Historically interrupt numbers represent
-IRQ lines which run from the PCI device to the Interrupt controller.
-With MSI and MSI-X (more below) the interrupt number is a CPU "vector".
-
-request_irq() also enables the interrupt. Make sure the device is
-quiesced and does not have any interrupts pending before registering
-the interrupt handler.
-
-MSI and MSI-X are PCI capabilities. Both are "Message Signaled Interrupts"
-which deliver interrupts to the CPU via a DMA write to a Local APIC.
-The fundamental difference between MSI and MSI-X is how multiple
-"vectors" get allocated. MSI requires contiguous blocks of vectors
-while MSI-X can allocate several individual ones.
-
-MSI capability can be enabled by calling pci_enable_msi() or
-pci_enable_msix() before calling request_irq(). This causes
-the PCI support to program CPU vector data into the PCI device
-capability registers.
-
-If your PCI device supports both, try to enable MSI-X first.
-Only one can be enabled at a time.  Many architectures, chip-sets,
-or BIOSes do NOT support MSI or MSI-X and the call to pci_enable_msi/msix
-will fail. This is important to note since many drivers have
-two (or more) interrupt handlers: one for MSI/MSI-X and another for IRQs.
-They choose which handler to register with request_irq() based on the
-return value from pci_enable_msi/msix().
-
-There are (at least) two really good reasons for using MSI:
-1) MSI is an exclusive interrupt vector by definition.
-   This means the interrupt handler doesn't have to verify
-   its device caused the interrupt.
-
-2) MSI avoids DMA/IRQ race conditions. DMA to host memory is guaranteed
-   to be visible to the host CPU(s) when the MSI is delivered. This
-   is important for both data coherency and avoiding stale control data.
-   This guarantee allows the driver to omit MMIO reads to flush
-   the DMA stream.
-
-See drivers/infiniband/hw/mthca/ or drivers/net/tg3.c for examples
-of MSI/MSI-X usage.
-
-
-
-4. PCI device shutdown
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When a PCI device driver is being unloaded, most of the following
-steps need to be performed:
-
-	Disable the device from generating IRQs
-	Release the IRQ (free_irq())
-	Stop all DMA activity
-	Release DMA buffers (both streaming and consistent)
-	Unregister from other subsystems (e.g. scsi or netdev)
-	Disable device from responding to MMIO/IO Port addresses
-	Release MMIO/IO Port resource(s)
-
-
-4.1 Stop IRQs on the device
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-How to do this is chip/device specific. If it's not done, it opens
-the possibility of a "screaming interrupt" if (and only if)
-the IRQ is shared with another device.
-
-When the shared IRQ handler is "unhooked", the remaining devices
-using the same IRQ line will still need the IRQ enabled. Thus if the
-"unhooked" device asserts IRQ line, the system will respond assuming
-it was one of the remaining devices asserted the IRQ line. Since none
-of the other devices will handle the IRQ, the system will "hang" until
-it decides the IRQ isn't going to get handled and masks the IRQ (100,000
-iterations later). Once the shared IRQ is masked, the remaining devices
-will stop functioning properly. Not a nice situation.
-
-This is another reason to use MSI or MSI-X if it's available.
-MSI and MSI-X are defined to be exclusive interrupts and thus
-are not susceptible to the "screaming interrupt" problem.
-
-
-4.2 Release the IRQ
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Once the device is quiesced (no more IRQs), one can call free_irq().
-This function will return control once any pending IRQs are handled,
-"unhook" the drivers IRQ handler from that IRQ, and finally release
-the IRQ if no one else is using it.
-
-
-4.3 Stop all DMA activity
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-It's extremely important to stop all DMA operations BEFORE attempting
-to deallocate DMA control data. Failure to do so can result in memory
-corruption, hangs, and on some chip-sets a hard crash.
-
-Stopping DMA after stopping the IRQs can avoid races where the
-IRQ handler might restart DMA engines.
-
-While this step sounds obvious and trivial, several "mature" drivers
-didn't get this step right in the past.
-
-
-4.4 Release DMA buffers
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Once DMA is stopped, clean up streaming DMA first.
-I.e. unmap data buffers and return buffers to "upstream"
-owners if there is one.
-
-Then clean up "consistent" buffers which contain the control data.
-
-See Documentation/DMA-API.txt for details on unmapping interfaces.
-
-
-4.5 Unregister from other subsystems
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Most low level PCI device drivers support some other subsystem
-like USB, ALSA, SCSI, NetDev, Infiniband, etc. Make sure your
-driver isn't losing resources from that other subsystem.
-If this happens, typically the symptom is an Oops (panic) when
-the subsystem attempts to call into a driver that has been unloaded.
-
-
-4.6 Disable Device from responding to MMIO/IO Port addresses
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-io_unmap() MMIO or IO Port resources and then call pci_disable_device().
-This is the symmetric opposite of pci_enable_device().
-Do not access device registers after calling pci_disable_device().
-
-
-4.7 Release MMIO/IO Port Resource(s)
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Call pci_release_region() to mark the MMIO or IO Port range as available.
-Failure to do so usually results in the inability to reload the driver.
-
-
-
-5. How to access PCI config space
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-You can use pci_(read|write)_config_(byte|word|dword) to access the config
-space of a device represented by struct pci_dev *. All these functions return 0
-when successful or an error code (PCIBIOS_...) which can be translated to a text
-string by pcibios_strerror. Most drivers expect that accesses to valid PCI
-devices don't fail.
-
-If you don't have a struct pci_dev available, you can call
-pci_bus_(read|write)_config_(byte|word|dword) to access a given device
-and function on that bus.
-
-If you access fields in the standard portion of the config header, please
-use symbolic names of locations and bits declared in <linux/pci.h>.
-
-If you need to access Extended PCI Capability registers, just call
-pci_find_capability() for the particular capability and it will find the
-corresponding register block for you.
-
-
-
-6. Other interesting functions
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-pci_find_slot()			Find pci_dev corresponding to given bus and
-				slot numbers.
-pci_set_power_state()		Set PCI Power Management state (0=D0 ... 3=D3)
-pci_find_capability()		Find specified capability in device's capability
-				list.
-pci_resource_start()		Returns bus start address for a given PCI region
-pci_resource_end()		Returns bus end address for a given PCI region
-pci_resource_len()		Returns the byte length of a PCI region
-pci_set_drvdata()		Set private driver data pointer for a pci_dev
-pci_get_drvdata()		Return private driver data pointer for a pci_dev
-pci_set_mwi()			Enable Memory-Write-Invalidate transactions.
-pci_clear_mwi()			Disable Memory-Write-Invalidate transactions.
-
-
-
-7. Miscellaneous hints
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When displaying PCI device names to the user (for example when a driver wants
-to tell the user what card has it found), please use pci_name(pci_dev).
-
-Always refer to the PCI devices by a pointer to the pci_dev structure.
-All PCI layer functions use this identification and it's the only
-reasonable one. Don't use bus/slot/function numbers except for very
-special purposes -- on systems with multiple primary buses their semantics
-can be pretty complex.
-
-Don't try to turn on Fast Back to Back writes in your driver.  All devices
-on the bus need to be capable of doing it, so this is something which needs
-to be handled by platform and generic code, not individual drivers.
-
-
-
-8. Vendor and device identifications
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-One is not not required to add new device ids to include/linux/pci_ids.h.
-Please add PCI_VENDOR_ID_xxx for vendors and a hex constant for device ids.
-
-PCI_VENDOR_ID_xxx constants are re-used. The device ids are arbitrary
-hex numbers (vendor controlled) and normally used only in a single
-location, the pci_device_id table.
-
-Please DO submit new vendor/device ids to pciids.sourceforge.net project.
-
-
-
-9. Obsolete functions
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-There are several functions which you might come across when trying to
-port an old driver to the new PCI interface.  They are no longer present
-in the kernel as they aren't compatible with hotplug or PCI domains or
-having sane locking.
-
-pci_find_device()	Superseded by pci_get_device()
-pci_find_subsys()	Superseded by pci_get_subsys()
-pci_find_slot()		Superseded by pci_get_slot()
-
-
-The alternative is the traditional PCI device driver that walks PCI
-device lists. This is still possible but discouraged.
-
-
-
-10. MMIO Space and "Write Posting"
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Converting a driver from using I/O Port space to using MMIO space
-often requires some additional changes. Specifically, "write posting"
-needs to be handled. Many drivers (e.g. tg3, acenic, sym53c8xx_2)
-already do this. I/O Port space guarantees write transactions reach the PCI
-device before the CPU can continue. Writes to MMIO space allow the CPU
-to continue before the transaction reaches the PCI device. HW weenies
-call this "Write Posting" because the write completion is "posted" to
-the CPU before the transaction has reached its destination.
-
-Thus, timing sensitive code should add readl() where the CPU is
-expected to wait before doing other work.  The classic "bit banging"
-sequence works fine for I/O Port space:
-
-       for (i = 8; --i; val >>= 1) {
-               outb(val & 1, ioport_reg);      /* write bit */
-               udelay(10);
-       }
-
-The same sequence for MMIO space should be:
-
-       for (i = 8; --i; val >>= 1) {
-               writeb(val & 1, mmio_reg);      /* write bit */
-               readb(safe_mmio_reg);           /* flush posted write */
-               udelay(10);
-       }
-
-It is important that "safe_mmio_reg" not have any side effects that
-interferes with the correct operation of the device.
-
-Another case to watch out for is when resetting a PCI device. Use PCI
-Configuration space reads to flush the writel(). This will gracefully
-handle the PCI master abort on all platforms if the PCI device is
-expected to not respond to a readl().  Most x86 platforms will allow
-MMIO reads to master abort (a.k.a. "Soft Fail") and return garbage
-(e.g. ~0). But many RISC platforms will crash (a.k.a."Hard Fail").
-

Documentation/pcieaer-howto.txt

@@ -1,253 +0,0 @@
-   The PCI Express Advanced Error Reporting Driver Guide HOWTO
-		T. Long Nguyen	<tom.l.nguyen@intel.com>
-		Yanmin Zhang	<yanmin.zhang@intel.com>
-				07/29/2006
-
-
-1. Overview
-
-1.1 About this guide
-
-This guide describes the basics of the PCI Express Advanced Error
-Reporting (AER) driver and provides information on how to use it, as
-well as how to enable the drivers of endpoint devices to conform with
-PCI Express AER driver.
-
-1.2 Copyright © Intel Corporation 2006.
-
-1.3 What is the PCI Express AER Driver?
-
-PCI Express error signaling can occur on the PCI Express link itself
-or on behalf of transactions initiated on the link. PCI Express
-defines two error reporting paradigms: the baseline capability and
-the Advanced Error Reporting capability. The baseline capability is
-required of all PCI Express components providing a minimum defined
-set of error reporting requirements. Advanced Error Reporting
-capability is implemented with a PCI Express advanced error reporting
-extended capability structure providing more robust error reporting.
-
-The PCI Express AER driver provides the infrastructure to support PCI
-Express Advanced Error Reporting capability. The PCI Express AER
-driver provides three basic functions:
-
--	Gathers the comprehensive error information if errors occurred.
--	Reports error to the users.
--	Performs error recovery actions.
-
-AER driver only attaches root ports which support PCI-Express AER
-capability.
-
-
-2. User Guide
-
-2.1 Include the PCI Express AER Root Driver into the Linux Kernel
-
-The PCI Express AER Root driver is a Root Port service driver attached
-to the PCI Express Port Bus driver. If a user wants to use it, the driver
-has to be compiled. Option CONFIG_PCIEAER supports this capability. It
-depends on CONFIG_PCIEPORTBUS, so pls. set CONFIG_PCIEPORTBUS=y and
-CONFIG_PCIEAER = y.
-
-2.2 Load PCI Express AER Root Driver
-There is a case where a system has AER support in BIOS. Enabling the AER
-Root driver and having AER support in BIOS may result unpredictable
-behavior. To avoid this conflict, a successful load of the AER Root driver
-requires ACPI _OSC support in the BIOS to allow the AER Root driver to
-request for native control of AER. See the PCI FW 3.0 Specification for
-details regarding OSC usage. Currently, lots of firmwares don't provide
-_OSC support while they use PCI Express. To support such firmwares,
-forceload, a parameter of type bool, could enable AER to continue to
-be initiated although firmwares have no _OSC support. To enable the
-walkaround, pls. add aerdriver.forceload=y to kernel boot parameter line
-when booting kernel. Note that forceload=n by default.
-
-2.3 AER error output
-When a PCI-E AER error is captured, an error message will be outputed to
-console. If it's a correctable error, it is outputed as a warning.
-Otherwise, it is printed as an error. So users could choose different
-log level to filter out correctable error messages.
-
-Below shows an example.
-+------ PCI-Express Device Error -----+
-Error Severity          : Uncorrected (Fatal)
-PCIE Bus Error type     : Transaction Layer
-Unsupported Request     : First
-Requester ID            : 0500
-VendorID=8086h, DeviceID=0329h, Bus=05h, Device=00h, Function=00h
-TLB Header:
-04000001 00200a03 05010000 00050100
-
-In the example, 'Requester ID' means the ID of the device who sends
-the error message to root port. Pls. refer to pci express specs for
-other fields.
-
-
-3. Developer Guide
-
-To enable AER aware support requires a software driver to configure
-the AER capability structure within its device and to provide callbacks.
-
-To support AER better, developers need understand how AER does work
-firstly.
-
-PCI Express errors are classified into two types: correctable errors
-and uncorrectable errors. This classification is based on the impacts
-of those errors, which may result in degraded performance or function
-failure.
-
-Correctable errors pose no impacts on the functionality of the
-interface. The PCI Express protocol can recover without any software
-intervention or any loss of data. These errors are detected and
-corrected by hardware. Unlike correctable errors, uncorrectable
-errors impact functionality of the interface. Uncorrectable errors
-can cause a particular transaction or a particular PCI Express link
-to be unreliable. Depending on those error conditions, uncorrectable
-errors are further classified into non-fatal errors and fatal errors.
-Non-fatal errors cause the particular transaction to be unreliable,
-but the PCI Express link itself is fully functional. Fatal errors, on
-the other hand, cause the link to be unreliable.
-
-When AER is enabled, a PCI Express device will automatically send an
-error message to the PCIE root port above it when the device captures
-an error. The Root Port, upon receiving an error reporting message,
-internally processes and logs the error message in its PCI Express
-capability structure. Error information being logged includes storing
-the error reporting agent's requestor ID into the Error Source
-Identification Registers and setting the error bits of the Root Error
-Status Register accordingly. If AER error reporting is enabled in Root
-Error Command Register, the Root Port generates an interrupt if an
-error is detected.
-
-Note that the errors as described above are related to the PCI Express
-hierarchy and links. These errors do not include any device specific
-errors because device specific errors will still get sent directly to
-the device driver.
-
-3.1 Configure the AER capability structure
-
-AER aware drivers of PCI Express component need change the device
-control registers to enable AER. They also could change AER registers,
-including mask and severity registers. Helper function
-pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting could be used to enable AER. See
-section 3.3.
-
-3.2. Provide callbacks
-
-3.2.1 callback reset_link to reset pci express link
-
-This callback is used to reset the pci express physical link when a
-fatal error happens. The root port aer service driver provides a
-default reset_link function, but different upstream ports might
-have different specifications to reset pci express link, so all
-upstream ports should provide their own reset_link functions.
-
-In struct pcie_port_service_driver, a new pointer, reset_link, is
-added.
-
-pci_ers_result_t (*reset_link) (struct pci_dev *dev);
-
-Section 3.2.2.2 provides more detailed info on when to call
-reset_link.
-
-3.2.2 PCI error-recovery callbacks
-
-The PCI Express AER Root driver uses error callbacks to coordinate
-with downstream device drivers associated with a hierarchy in question
-when performing error recovery actions.
-
-Data struct pci_driver has a pointer, err_handler, to point to
-pci_error_handlers who consists of a couple of callback function
-pointers. AER driver follows the rules defined in
-pci-error-recovery.txt except pci express specific parts (e.g.
-reset_link). Pls. refer to pci-error-recovery.txt for detailed
-definitions of the callbacks.
-
-Below sections specify when to call the error callback functions.
-
-3.2.2.1 Correctable errors
-
-Correctable errors pose no impacts on the functionality of
-the interface. The PCI Express protocol can recover without any
-software intervention or any loss of data. These errors do not
-require any recovery actions. The AER driver clears the device's
-correctable error status register accordingly and logs these errors.
-
-3.2.2.2 Non-correctable (non-fatal and fatal) errors
-
-If an error message indicates a non-fatal error, performing link reset
-at upstream is not required. The AER driver calls error_detected(dev,
-pci_channel_io_normal) to all drivers associated within a hierarchy in
-question. for example,
-EndPoint<==>DownstreamPort B<==>UpstreamPort A<==>RootPort.
-If Upstream port A captures an AER error, the hierarchy consists of
-Downstream port B and EndPoint.
-
-A driver may return PCI_ERS_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER,
-PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT, or PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET, depending on
-whether it can recover or the AER driver calls mmio_enabled as next.
-
-If an error message indicates a fatal error, kernel will broadcast
-error_detected(dev, pci_channel_io_frozen) to all drivers within
-a hierarchy in question. Then, performing link reset at upstream is
-necessary. As different kinds of devices might use different approaches
-to reset link, AER port service driver is required to provide the
-function to reset link. Firstly, kernel looks for if the upstream
-component has an aer driver. If it has, kernel uses the reset_link
-callback of the aer driver. If the upstream component has no aer driver
-and the port is downstream port, we will use the aer driver of the
-root port who reports the AER error. As for upstream ports,
-they should provide their own aer service drivers with reset_link
-function. If error_detected returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER and
-reset_link returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_RECOVERED, the error handling goes
-to mmio_enabled.
-
-3.3 helper functions
-
-3.3.1 int pci_find_aer_capability(struct pci_dev *dev);
-pci_find_aer_capability locates the PCI Express AER capability
-in the device configuration space. If the device doesn't support
-PCI-Express AER, the function returns 0.
-
-3.3.2 int pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
-pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting enables the device to send error
-messages to root port when an error is detected. Note that devices
-don't enable the error reporting by default, so device drivers need
-call this function to enable it.
-
-3.3.3 int pci_disable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
-pci_disable_pcie_error_reporting disables the device to send error
-messages to root port when an error is detected.
-
-3.3.4 int pci_cleanup_aer_uncorrect_error_status(struct pci_dev *dev);
-pci_cleanup_aer_uncorrect_error_status cleanups the uncorrectable
-error status register.
-
-3.4 Frequent Asked Questions
-
-Q: What happens if a PCI Express device driver does not provide an
-error recovery handler (pci_driver->err_handler is equal to NULL)?
-
-A: The devices attached with the driver won't be recovered. If the
-error is fatal, kernel will print out warning messages. Please refer
-to section 3 for more information.
-
-Q: What happens if an upstream port service driver does not provide
-callback reset_link?
-
-A: Fatal error recovery will fail if the errors are reported by the
-upstream ports who are attached by the service driver.
-
-Q: How does this infrastructure deal with driver that is not PCI
-Express aware?
-
-A: This infrastructure calls the error callback functions of the
-driver when an error happens. But if the driver is not aware of
-PCI Express, the device might not report its own errors to root
-port.
-
-Q: What modifications will that driver need to make it compatible
-with the PCI Express AER Root driver?
-
-A: It could call the helper functions to enable AER in devices and
-cleanup uncorrectable status register. Pls. refer to section 3.3.
-

Documentation/power/devices.txt

@@ -196,6 +196,11 @@ its parent; and can't be removed or suspended after that parent.
 
 The policy is that the device tree should match hardware bus topology.
 (Or at least the control bus, for devices which use multiple busses.)
+In particular, this means that a device registration may fail if the parent of
+the device is suspending (ie. has been chosen by the PM core as the next
+device to suspend) or has already suspended, as well as after all of the other
+devices have been suspended.  Device drivers must be prepared to cope with such
+situations.
 
 
 Suspending Devices

Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt

@@ -59,12 +59,39 @@ Table of Contents
       p) Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface
 	  q) USB EHCI controllers
 
-  VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices
+  VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips
+    1) The /system-controller node
+    2) Child nodes of /system-controller
+      a) Marvell Discovery MDIO bus
+      b) Marvell Discovery ethernet controller
+      c) Marvell Discovery PHY nodes
+      d) Marvell Discovery SDMA nodes
+      e) Marvell Discovery BRG nodes
+      f) Marvell Discovery CUNIT nodes
+      g) Marvell Discovery MPSCROUTING nodes
+      h) Marvell Discovery MPSCINTR nodes
+      i) Marvell Discovery MPSC nodes
+      j) Marvell Discovery Watch Dog Timer nodes
+      k) Marvell Discovery I2C nodes
+      l) Marvell Discovery PIC (Programmable Interrupt Controller) nodes
+      m) Marvell Discovery MPP (Multipurpose Pins) multiplexing nodes
+      n) Marvell Discovery GPP (General Purpose Pins) nodes
+      o) Marvell Discovery PCI host bridge node
+      p) Marvell Discovery CPU Error nodes
+      q) Marvell Discovery SRAM Controller nodes
+      r) Marvell Discovery PCI Error Handler nodes
+      s) Marvell Discovery Memory Controller nodes
+
+  VIII - Specifying interrupt information for devices
     1) interrupts property
     2) interrupt-parent property
     3) OpenPIC Interrupt Controllers
     4) ISA Interrupt Controllers
 
+  VIII - Specifying GPIO information for devices
+    1) gpios property
+    2) gpio-controller nodes
+
   Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 
 
@@ -1269,10 +1296,6 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
 
   Recommended properties:
 
-    - linux,network-index : This is the intended "index" of this
-      network device.  This is used by the bootwrapper to interpret
-      MAC addresses passed by the firmware when no information other
-      than indices is available to associate an address with a device.
     - phy-connection-type : a string naming the controller/PHY interface type,
       i.e., "mii" (default), "rmii", "gmii", "rgmii", "rgmii-id", "sgmii",
       "tbi", or "rtbi".  This property is only really needed if the connection
@@ -1622,8 +1645,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
    - device_type : should be "network", "hldc", "uart", "transparent"
      "bisync", "atm", or "serial".
    - compatible : could be "ucc_geth" or "fsl_atm" and so on.
-   - model : should be "UCC".
-   - device-id : the ucc number(1-8), corresponding to UCCx in UM.
+   - cell-index : the ucc number(1-8), corresponding to UCCx in UM.
    - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
    - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
      field that represents an encoding of the sense and level
@@ -1667,10 +1689,6 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
    - phy-handle : The phandle for the PHY connected to this controller.
 
    Recommended properties:
-   - linux,network-index : This is the intended "index" of this
-     network device.  This is used by the bootwrapper to interpret
-     MAC addresses passed by the firmware when no information other
-     than indices is available to associate an address with a device.
    - phy-connection-type : a string naming the controller/PHY interface type,
      i.e., "mii" (default), "rmii", "gmii", "rgmii", "rgmii-id" (Internal
      Delay), "rgmii-txid" (delay on TX only), "rgmii-rxid" (delay on RX only),
@@ -1680,8 +1698,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
 	ucc@2000 {
 		device_type = "network";
 		compatible = "ucc_geth";
-		model = "UCC";
-		device-id = <1>;
+		cell-index = <1>;
 		reg = <2000 200>;
 		interrupts = <a0 0>;
 		interrupt-parent = <700>;
@@ -1995,7 +2012,6 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
 		interrupts = <20 8>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
 		phy-handle = <&PHY0>;
-		linux,network-index = <0>;
 		fsl,cpm-command = <12000300>;
 	};
 
@@ -2217,12 +2233,6 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
 			  EMAC, that is the content of the current (bogus) "phy-port"
 			  property.
 
-    Recommended properties:
-    - linux,network-index : This is the intended "index" of this
-      network device.  This is used by the bootwrapper to interpret
-      MAC addresses passed by the firmware when no information other
-      than indices is available to associate an address with a device.
-
     Optional properties:
     - phy-address       : 1 cell, optional, MDIO address of the PHY. If absent,
 			  a search is performed.
@@ -2246,7 +2256,6 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
     Example:
 
 	EMAC0: ethernet@40000800 {
-		linux,network-index = <0>;
 		device_type = "network";
 		compatible = "ibm,emac-440gp", "ibm,emac";
 		interrupt-parent = <&UIC1>;
@@ -2592,6 +2601,17 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
                       differ between different families.  May be
                       'virtex2p', 'virtex4', or 'virtex5'.
 
+      vi) Xilinx Uart 16550
+
+      Xilinx UART 16550 devices are very similar to the NS16550 but with
+      different register spacing and an offset from the base address.
+
+      Requred properties:
+       - clock-frequency : Frequency of the clock input
+       - reg-offset : A value of 3 is required
+       - reg-shift : A value of 2 is required
+
+
     p) Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface
 
        The SSI is a serial device that communicates with audio codecs.  It can
@@ -2816,10 +2836,562 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
 		   big-endian;
 	   };
 
+    r) Freescale Display Interface Unit
+
+    The Freescale DIU is a LCD controller, with proper hardware, it can also
+    drive DVI monitors.
+
+    Required properties:
+    - compatible : should be "fsl-diu".
+    - reg : should contain at least address and length of the DIU register
+      set.
+    - Interrupts : one DIU interrupt should be describe here.
+
+    Example (MPC8610HPCD)
+	display@2c000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,diu";
+		reg = <0x2c000 100>;
+		interrupts = <72 2>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
+	};
+
+    s) Freescale on board FPGA
+
+    This is the memory-mapped registers for on board FPGA.
+
+    Required properities:
+    - compatible : should be "fsl,fpga-pixis".
+    - reg : should contain the address and the lenght of the FPPGA register
+      set.
+
+    Example (MPC8610HPCD)
+	board-control@e8000000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,fpga-pixis";
+		reg = <0xe8000000 32>;
+	};
+
+VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips
+===========================================================
+
+The Marvell mv64[345]60 series of system controller chips contain
+many of the peripherals needed to implement a complete computer
+system.  In this section, we define device tree nodes to describe
+the system controller chip itself and each of the peripherals
+which it contains.  Compatible string values for each node are
+prefixed with the string "marvell,", for Marvell Technology Group Ltd.
+
+1) The /system-controller node
+
+  This node is used to represent the system-controller and must be
+  present when the system uses a system contller chip. The top-level
+  system-controller node contains information that is global to all
+  devices within the system controller chip. The node name begins
+  with "system-controller" followed by the unit address, which is
+  the base address of the memory-mapped register set for the system
+  controller chip.
+
+  Required properties:
+
+    - ranges : Describes the translation of system controller addresses
+      for memory mapped registers.
+    - clock-frequency: Contains the main clock frequency for the system
+      controller chip.
+    - reg : This property defines the address and size of the
+      memory-mapped registers contained within the system controller
+      chip.  The address specified in the "reg" property should match
+      the unit address of the system-controller node.
+    - #address-cells : Address representation for system controller
+      devices.  This field represents the number of cells needed to
+      represent the address of the memory-mapped registers of devices
+      within the system controller chip.
+    - #size-cells : Size representation for for the memory-mapped
+      registers within the system controller chip.
+    - #interrupt-cells : Defines the width of cells used to represent
+      interrupts.
+
+  Optional properties:
+
+    - model : The specific model of the system controller chip.  Such
+      as, "mv64360", "mv64460", or "mv64560".
+    - compatible : A string identifying the compatibility identifiers
+      of the system controller chip.
+
+  The system-controller node contains child nodes for each system
+  controller device that the platform uses.  Nodes should not be created
+  for devices which exist on the system controller chip but are not used
+
+  Example Marvell Discovery mv64360 system-controller node:
+
+    system-controller@f1000000 { /* Marvell Discovery mv64360 */
+	    #address-cells = <1>;
+	    #size-cells = <1>;
+	    model = "mv64360";                      /* Default */
+	    compatible = "marvell,mv64360";
+	    clock-frequency = <133333333>;
+	    reg = <0xf1000000 0x10000>;
+	    virtual-reg = <0xf1000000>;
+	    ranges = <0x88000000 0x88000000 0x1000000 /* PCI 0 I/O Space */
+		    0x80000000 0x80000000 0x8000000 /* PCI 0 MEM Space */
+		    0xa0000000 0xa0000000 0x4000000 /* User FLASH */
+		    0x00000000 0xf1000000 0x0010000 /* Bridge's regs */
+		    0xf2000000 0xf2000000 0x0040000>;/* Integrated SRAM */
+
+	    [ child node definitions... ]
+    }
+
+2) Child nodes of /system-controller
+
+   a) Marvell Discovery MDIO bus
+
+   The MDIO is a bus to which the PHY devices are connected.  For each
+   device that exists on this bus, a child node should be created.  See
+   the definition of the PHY node below for an example of how to define
+   a PHY.
+
+   Required properties:
+     - #address-cells : Should be <1>
+     - #size-cells : Should be <0>
+     - device_type : Should be "mdio"
+     - compatible : Should be "marvell,mv64360-mdio"
+
+   Example:
+
+     mdio {
+	     #address-cells = <1>;
+	     #size-cells = <0>;
+	     device_type = "mdio";
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-mdio";
+
+	     ethernet-phy@0 {
+		     ......
+	     };
+     };
+
+
+   b) Marvell Discovery ethernet controller
+
+   The Discover ethernet controller is described with two levels
+   of nodes.  The first level describes an ethernet silicon block
+   and the second level describes up to 3 ethernet nodes within
+   that block.  The reason for the multiple levels is that the
+   registers for the node are interleaved within a single set
+   of registers.  The "ethernet-block" level describes the
+   shared register set, and the "ethernet" nodes describe ethernet
+   port-specific properties.
+
+   Ethernet block node
+
+   Required properties:
+     - #address-cells : <1>
+     - #size-cells : <0>
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-eth-block"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this block
+
+   Example Discovery Ethernet block node:
+     ethernet-block@2000 {
+	     #address-cells = <1>;
+	     #size-cells = <0>;
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-eth-block";
+	     reg = <0x2000 0x2000>;
+	     ethernet@0 {
+		     .......
+	     };
+     };
+
+   Ethernet port node
+
+   Required properties:
+     - device_type : Should be "network".
+     - compatible : Should be "marvell,mv64360-eth".
+     - reg : Should be <0>, <1>, or <2>, according to which registers
+       within the silicon block the device uses.
+     - interrupts : <a> where a is the interrupt number for the port.
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+     - phy : the phandle for the PHY connected to this ethernet
+       controller.
+     - local-mac-address : 6 bytes, MAC address
+
+   Example Discovery Ethernet port node:
+     ethernet@0 {
+	     device_type = "network";
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-eth";
+	     reg = <0>;
+	     interrupts = <32>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+	     phy = <&PHY0>;
+	     local-mac-address = [ 00 00 00 00 00 00 ];
+     };
+
+
+
+   c) Marvell Discovery PHY nodes
+
+   Required properties:
+     - device_type : Should be "ethernet-phy"
+     - interrupts : <a> where a is the interrupt number for this phy.
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
+       services interrupts for this device.
+     - reg : The ID number for the phy, usually a small integer
 
-   More devices will be defined as this spec matures.
+   Example Discovery PHY node:
+     ethernet-phy@1 {
+	     device_type = "ethernet-phy";
+	     compatible = "broadcom,bcm5421";
+	     interrupts = <76>;      /* GPP 12 */
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+	     reg = <1>;
+     };
 
-VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices
+
+   d) Marvell Discovery SDMA nodes
+
+   Represent DMA hardware associated with the MPSC (multiprotocol
+   serial controllers).
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-sdma"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - interrupts : <a> where a is the interrupt number for the DMA
+       device.
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+
+   Example Discovery SDMA node:
+     sdma@4000 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-sdma";
+	     reg = <0x4000 0xc18>;
+	     virtual-reg = <0xf1004000>;
+	     interrupts = <36>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+     };
+
+
+   e) Marvell Discovery BRG nodes
+
+   Represent baud rate generator hardware associated with the MPSC
+   (multiprotocol serial controllers).
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-brg"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - clock-src : A value from 0 to 15 which selects the clock
+       source for the baud rate generator.  This value corresponds
+       to the CLKS value in the BRGx configuration register.  See
+       the mv64x60 User's Manual.
+     - clock-frequence : The frequency (in Hz) of the baud rate
+       generator's input clock.
+     - current-speed : The current speed setting (presumably by
+       firmware) of the baud rate generator.
+
+   Example Discovery BRG node:
+     brg@b200 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-brg";
+	     reg = <0xb200 0x8>;
+	     clock-src = <8>;
+	     clock-frequency = <133333333>;
+	     current-speed = <9600>;
+     };
+
+
+   f) Marvell Discovery CUNIT nodes
+
+   Represent the Serial Communications Unit device hardware.
+
+   Required properties:
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+
+   Example Discovery CUNIT node:
+     cunit@f200 {
+	     reg = <0xf200 0x200>;
+     };
+
+
+   g) Marvell Discovery MPSCROUTING nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's MPSC routing hardware
+
+   Required properties:
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+
+   Example Discovery CUNIT node:
+     mpscrouting@b500 {
+	     reg = <0xb400 0xc>;
+     };
+
+
+   h) Marvell Discovery MPSCINTR nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's MPSC DMA interrupt hardware registers
+   (SDMA cause and mask registers).
+
+   Required properties:
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+
+   Example Discovery MPSCINTR node:
+     mpsintr@b800 {
+	     reg = <0xb800 0x100>;
+     };
+
+
+   i) Marvell Discovery MPSC nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's MPSC (Multiprotocol Serial Controller)
+   serial port.
+
+   Required properties:
+     - device_type : "serial"
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-mpsc"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - sdma : the phandle for the SDMA node used by this port
+     - brg : the phandle for the BRG node used by this port
+     - cunit : the phandle for the CUNIT node used by this port
+     - mpscrouting : the phandle for the MPSCROUTING node used by this port
+     - mpscintr : the phandle for the MPSCINTR node used by this port
+     - cell-index : the hardware index of this cell in the MPSC core
+     - max_idle : value needed for MPSC CHR3 (Maximum Frame Length)
+       register
+     - interrupts : <a> where a is the interrupt number for the MPSC.
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+
+   Example Discovery MPSCINTR node:
+     mpsc@8000 {
+	     device_type = "serial";
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-mpsc";
+	     reg = <0x8000 0x38>;
+	     virtual-reg = <0xf1008000>;
+	     sdma = <&SDMA0>;
+	     brg = <&BRG0>;
+	     cunit = <&CUNIT>;
+	     mpscrouting = <&MPSCROUTING>;
+	     mpscintr = <&MPSCINTR>;
+	     cell-index = <0>;
+	     max_idle = <40>;
+	     interrupts = <40>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+     };
+
+
+   j) Marvell Discovery Watch Dog Timer nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's watchdog timer hardware
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-wdt"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+
+   Example Discovery Watch Dog Timer node:
+     wdt@b410 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-wdt";
+	     reg = <0xb410 0x8>;
+     };
+
+
+   k) Marvell Discovery I2C nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's I2C hardware
+
+   Required properties:
+     - device_type : "i2c"
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-i2c"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - interrupts : <a> where a is the interrupt number for the I2C.
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+
+   Example Discovery I2C node:
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-i2c";
+	     reg = <0xc000 0x20>;
+	     virtual-reg = <0xf100c000>;
+	     interrupts = <37>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+     };
+
+
+   l) Marvell Discovery PIC (Programmable Interrupt Controller) nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's PIC hardware
+
+   Required properties:
+     - #interrupt-cells : <1>
+     - #address-cells : <0>
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-pic"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - interrupt-controller
+
+   Example Discovery PIC node:
+     pic {
+	     #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+	     #address-cells = <0>;
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-pic";
+	     reg = <0x0 0x88>;
+	     interrupt-controller;
+     };
+
+
+   m) Marvell Discovery MPP (Multipurpose Pins) multiplexing nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's MPP hardware
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-mpp"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+
+   Example Discovery MPP node:
+     mpp@f000 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-mpp";
+	     reg = <0xf000 0x10>;
+     };
+
+
+   n) Marvell Discovery GPP (General Purpose Pins) nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's GPP hardware
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-gpp"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+
+   Example Discovery GPP node:
+     gpp@f000 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-gpp";
+	     reg = <0xf100 0x20>;
+     };
+
+
+   o) Marvell Discovery PCI host bridge node
+
+   Represents the Discovery's PCI host bridge device.  The properties
+   for this node conform to Rev 2.1 of the PCI Bus Binding to IEEE
+   1275-1994.  A typical value for the compatible property is
+   "marvell,mv64360-pci".
+
+   Example Discovery PCI host bridge node
+     pci@80000000 {
+	     #address-cells = <3>;
+	     #size-cells = <2>;
+	     #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+	     device_type = "pci";
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-pci";
+	     reg = <0xcf8 0x8>;
+	     ranges = <0x01000000 0x0        0x0
+			     0x88000000 0x0 0x01000000
+		       0x02000000 0x0 0x80000000
+			     0x80000000 0x0 0x08000000>;
+	     bus-range = <0 255>;
+	     clock-frequency = <66000000>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+	     interrupt-map-mask = <0xf800 0x0 0x0 0x7>;
+	     interrupt-map = <
+		     /* IDSEL 0x0a */
+		     0x5000 0 0 1 &PIC 80
+		     0x5000 0 0 2 &PIC 81
+		     0x5000 0 0 3 &PIC 91
+		     0x5000 0 0 4 &PIC 93
+
+		     /* IDSEL 0x0b */
+		     0x5800 0 0 1 &PIC 91
+		     0x5800 0 0 2 &PIC 93
+		     0x5800 0 0 3 &PIC 80
+		     0x5800 0 0 4 &PIC 81
+
+		     /* IDSEL 0x0c */
+		     0x6000 0 0 1 &PIC 91
+		     0x6000 0 0 2 &PIC 93
+		     0x6000 0 0 3 &PIC 80
+		     0x6000 0 0 4 &PIC 81
+
+		     /* IDSEL 0x0d */
+		     0x6800 0 0 1 &PIC 93
+		     0x6800 0 0 2 &PIC 80
+		     0x6800 0 0 3 &PIC 81
+		     0x6800 0 0 4 &PIC 91
+	     >;
+     };
+
+
+   p) Marvell Discovery CPU Error nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's CPU error handler device.
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-cpu-error"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - interrupts : the interrupt number for this device
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+
+   Example Discovery CPU Error node:
+     cpu-error@0070 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-cpu-error";
+	     reg = <0x70 0x10 0x128 0x28>;
+	     interrupts = <3>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+     };
+
+
+   q) Marvell Discovery SRAM Controller nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's SRAM controller device.
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-sram-ctrl"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - interrupts : the interrupt number for this device
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+
+   Example Discovery SRAM Controller node:
+     sram-ctrl@0380 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-sram-ctrl";
+	     reg = <0x380 0x80>;
+	     interrupts = <13>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+     };
+
+
+   r) Marvell Discovery PCI Error Handler nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's PCI error handler device.
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-pci-error"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - interrupts : the interrupt number for this device
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+
+   Example Discovery PCI Error Handler node:
+     pci-error@1d40 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-pci-error";
+	     reg = <0x1d40 0x40 0xc28 0x4>;
+	     interrupts = <12>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+     };
+
+
+   s) Marvell Discovery Memory Controller nodes
+
+   Represent the Discovery's memory controller device.
+
+   Required properties:
+     - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-mem-ctrl"
+     - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
+     - interrupts : the interrupt number for this device
+     - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller
+       that services interrupts for this device.
+
+   Example Discovery Memory Controller node:
+     mem-ctrl@1400 {
+	     compatible = "marvell,mv64360-mem-ctrl";
+	     reg = <0x1400 0x60>;
+	     interrupts = <17>;
+	     interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+     };
+
+
+VIII - Specifying interrupt information for devices
 ===================================================
 
 The device tree represents the busses and devices of a hardware
@@ -2905,6 +3477,54 @@ encodings listed below:
 	2 =  high to low edge sensitive type enabled
 	3 =  low to high edge sensitive type enabled
 
+VIII - Specifying GPIO information for devices
+==============================================
+
+1) gpios property
+-----------------
+
+Nodes that makes use of GPIOs should define them using `gpios' property,
+format of which is: <&gpio-controller1-phandle gpio1-specifier
+		     &gpio-controller2-phandle gpio2-specifier
+		     0 /* holes are permitted, means no GPIO 3 */
+		     &gpio-controller4-phandle gpio4-specifier
+		     ...>;
+
+Note that gpio-specifier length is controller dependent.
+
+gpio-specifier may encode: bank, pin position inside the bank,
+whether pin is open-drain and whether pin is logically inverted.
+
+Example of the node using GPIOs:
+
+	node {
+		gpios = <&qe_pio_e 18 0>;
+	};
+
+In this example gpio-specifier is "18 0" and encodes GPIO pin number,
+and empty GPIO flags as accepted by the "qe_pio_e" gpio-controller.
+
+2) gpio-controller nodes
+------------------------
+
+Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined,
+this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers.
+
+Example of two SOC GPIO banks defined as gpio-controller nodes:
+
+	qe_pio_a: gpio-controller@1400 {
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		compatible = "fsl,qe-pario-bank-a", "fsl,qe-pario-bank";
+		reg = <0x1400 0x18>;
+		gpio-controller;
+	};
+
+	qe_pio_e: gpio-controller@1460 {
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		compatible = "fsl,qe-pario-bank-e", "fsl,qe-pario-bank";
+		reg = <0x1460 0x18>;
+		gpio-controller;
+	};
 
 Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 ========================================

Documentation/powerpc/kvm_440.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+Hollis Blanchard <hollisb@us.ibm.com>
+15 Apr 2008
+
+Various notes on the implementation of KVM for PowerPC 440:
+
+To enforce isolation, host userspace, guest kernel, and guest userspace all
+run at user privilege level. Only the host kernel runs in supervisor mode.
+Executing privileged instructions in the guest traps into KVM (in the host
+kernel), where we decode and emulate them. Through this technique, unmodified
+440 Linux kernels can be run (slowly) as guests. Future performance work will
+focus on reducing the overhead and frequency of these traps.
+
+The usual code flow is started from userspace invoking an "run" ioctl, which
+causes KVM to switch into guest context. We use IVPR to hijack the host
+interrupt vectors while running the guest, which allows us to direct all
+interrupts to kvmppc_handle_interrupt(). At this point, we could either
+- handle the interrupt completely (e.g. emulate "mtspr SPRG0"), or
+- let the host interrupt handler run (e.g. when the decrementer fires), or
+- return to host userspace (e.g. when the guest performs device MMIO)
+
+Address spaces: We take advantage of the fact that Linux doesn't use the AS=1
+address space (in host or guest), which gives us virtual address space to use
+for guest mappings. While the guest is running, the host kernel remains mapped
+in AS=0, but the guest can only use AS=1 mappings.
+
+TLB entries: The TLB entries covering the host linear mapping remain
+present while running the guest. This reduces the overhead of lightweight
+exits, which are handled by KVM running in the host kernel. We keep three
+copies of the TLB:
+ - guest TLB: contents of the TLB as the guest sees it
+ - shadow TLB: the TLB that is actually in hardware while guest is running
+ - host TLB: to restore TLB state when context switching guest -> host
+When a TLB miss occurs because a mapping was not present in the shadow TLB,
+but was present in the guest TLB, KVM handles the fault without invoking the
+guest. Large guest pages are backed by multiple 4KB shadow pages through this
+mechanism.
+
+IO: MMIO and DCR accesses are emulated by userspace. We use virtio for network
+and block IO, so those drivers must be enabled in the guest. It's possible
+that some qemu device emulation (e.g. e1000 or rtl8139) may also work with
+little effort.

Documentation/powerpc/phyp-assisted-dump.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+
+                   Hypervisor-Assisted Dump
+                   ------------------------
+                       November 2007
+
+The goal of hypervisor-assisted dump is to enable the dump of
+a crashed system, and to do so from a fully-reset system, and
+to minimize the total elapsed time until the system is back
+in production use.
+
+As compared to kdump or other strategies, hypervisor-assisted
+dump offers several strong, practical advantages:
+
+-- Unlike kdump, the system has been reset, and loaded
+   with a fresh copy of the kernel.  In particular,
+   PCI and I/O devices have been reinitialized and are
+   in a clean, consistent state.
+-- As the dump is performed, the dumped memory becomes
+   immediately available to the system for normal use.
+-- After the dump is completed, no further reboots are
+   required; the system will be fully usable, and running
+   in it's normal, production mode on it normal kernel.
+
+The above can only be accomplished by coordination with,
+and assistance from the hypervisor. The procedure is
+as follows:
+
+-- When a system crashes, the hypervisor will save
+   the low 256MB of RAM to a previously registered
+   save region. It will also save system state, system
+   registers, and hardware PTE's.
+
+-- After the low 256MB area has been saved, the
+   hypervisor will reset PCI and other hardware state.
+   It will *not* clear RAM. It will then launch the
+   bootloader, as normal.
+
+-- The freshly booted kernel will notice that there
+   is a new node (ibm,dump-kernel) in the device tree,
+   indicating that there is crash data available from
+   a previous boot. It will boot into only 256MB of RAM,
+   reserving the rest of system memory.
+
+-- Userspace tools will parse /sys/kernel/release_region
+   and read /proc/vmcore to obtain the contents of memory,
+   which holds the previous crashed kernel. The userspace
+   tools may copy this info to disk, or network, nas, san,
+   iscsi, etc. as desired.
+
+   For Example: the values in /sys/kernel/release-region
+   would look something like this (address-range pairs).
+   CPU:0x177fee000-0x10000: HPTE:0x177ffe020-0x1000: /
+   DUMP:0x177fff020-0x10000000, 0x10000000-0x16F1D370A
+
+-- As the userspace tools complete saving a portion of
+   dump, they echo an offset and size to
+   /sys/kernel/release_region to release the reserved
+   memory back to general use.
+
+   An example of this is:
+     "echo 0x40000000 0x10000000 > /sys/kernel/release_region"
+   which will release 256MB at the 1GB boundary.
+
+Please note that the hypervisor-assisted dump feature
+is only available on Power6-based systems with recent
+firmware versions.
+
+Implementation details:
+----------------------
+
+During boot, a check is made to see if firmware supports
+this feature on this particular machine. If it does, then
+we check to see if a active dump is waiting for us. If yes
+then everything but 256 MB of RAM is reserved during early
+boot. This area is released once we collect a dump from user
+land scripts that are run. If there is dump data, then
+the /sys/kernel/release_region file is created, and
+the reserved memory is held.
+
+If there is no waiting dump data, then only the highest
+256MB of the ram is reserved as a scratch area. This area
+is *not* released: this region will be kept permanently
+reserved, so that it can act as a receptacle for a copy
+of the low 256MB in the case a crash does occur. See,
+however, "open issues" below, as to whether
+such a reserved region is really needed.
+
+Currently the dump will be copied from /proc/vmcore to a
+a new file upon user intervention. The starting address
+to be read and the range for each data point in provided
+in /sys/kernel/release_region.
+
+The tools to examine the dump will be same as the ones
+used for kdump.
+
+General notes:
+--------------
+Security: please note that there are potential security issues
+with any sort of dump mechanism. In particular, plaintext
+(unencrypted) data, and possibly passwords, may be present in
+the dump data. Userspace tools must take adequate precautions to
+preserve security.
+
+Open issues/ToDo:
+------------
+ o The various code paths that tell the hypervisor that a crash
+   occurred, vs. it simply being a normal reboot, should be
+   reviewed, and possibly clarified/fixed.
+
+ o Instead of using /sys/kernel, should there be a /sys/dump
+   instead? There is a dump_subsys being created by the s390 code,
+   perhaps the pseries code should use a similar layout as well.
+
+ o Is reserving a 256MB region really required? The goal of
+   reserving a 256MB scratch area is to make sure that no
+   important crash data is clobbered when the hypervisor
+   save low mem to the scratch area. But, if one could assure
+   that nothing important is located in some 256MB area, then
+   it would not need to be reserved. Something that can be
+   improved in subsequent versions.
+
+ o Still working the kdump team to integrate this with kdump,
+   some work remains but this would not affect the current
+   patches.
+
+ o Still need to write a shell script, to copy the dump away.
+   Currently I am parsing it manually.

Documentation/prctl/disable-tsc-ctxt-sw-stress-test.c

@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+ * Tests for prctl(PR_GET_TSC, ...) / prctl(PR_SET_TSC, ...)
+ *
+ * Tests if the control register is updated correctly
+ * at context switches
+ *
+ * Warning: this test will cause a very high load for a few seconds
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <inttypes.h>
+#include <wait.h>
+
+
+#include <sys/prctl.h>
+#include <linux/prctl.h>
+
+/* Get/set the process' ability to use the timestamp counter instruction */
+#ifndef PR_GET_TSC
+#define PR_GET_TSC 25
+#define PR_SET_TSC 26
+# define PR_TSC_ENABLE		1   /* allow the use of the timestamp counter */
+# define PR_TSC_SIGSEGV		2   /* throw a SIGSEGV instead of reading the TSC */
+#endif
+
+uint64_t rdtsc() {
+uint32_t lo, hi;
+/* We cannot use "=A", since this would use %rax on x86_64 */
+__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=a" (lo), "=d" (hi));
+return (uint64_t)hi << 32 | lo;
+}
+
+void sigsegv_expect(int sig)
+{
+	/* */
+}
+
+void segvtask(void)
+{
+	if (prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_SIGSEGV) < 0)
+	{
+		perror("prctl");
+		exit(0);
+	}
+	signal(SIGSEGV, sigsegv_expect);
+	alarm(10);
+	rdtsc();
+	fprintf(stderr, "FATAL ERROR, rdtsc() succeeded while disabled\n");
+	exit(0);
+}
+
+
+void sigsegv_fail(int sig)
+{
+	fprintf(stderr, "FATAL ERROR, rdtsc() failed while enabled\n");
+	exit(0);
+}
+
+void rdtsctask(void)
+{
+	if (prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_ENABLE) < 0)
+	{
+		perror("prctl");
+		exit(0);
+	}
+	signal(SIGSEGV, sigsegv_fail);
+	alarm(10);
+	for(;;) rdtsc();
+}
+
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	int n_tasks = 100, i;
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "[No further output means we're allright]\n");
+
+	for (i=0; i<n_tasks; i++)
+		if (fork() == 0)
+		{
+			if (i & 1)
+				segvtask();
+			else
+				rdtsctask();
+		}
+
+	for (i=0; i<n_tasks; i++)
+		wait(NULL);
+
+	exit(0);
+}
+

Documentation/prctl/disable-tsc-on-off-stress-test.c

@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+/*
+ * Tests for prctl(PR_GET_TSC, ...) / prctl(PR_SET_TSC, ...)
+ *
+ * Tests if the control register is updated correctly
+ * when set with prctl()
+ *
+ * Warning: this test will cause a very high load for a few seconds
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <inttypes.h>
+#include <wait.h>
+
+
+#include <sys/prctl.h>
+#include <linux/prctl.h>
+
+/* Get/set the process' ability to use the timestamp counter instruction */
+#ifndef PR_GET_TSC
+#define PR_GET_TSC 25
+#define PR_SET_TSC 26
+# define PR_TSC_ENABLE		1   /* allow the use of the timestamp counter */
+# define PR_TSC_SIGSEGV		2   /* throw a SIGSEGV instead of reading the TSC */
+#endif
+
+/* snippet from wikipedia :-) */
+
+uint64_t rdtsc() {
+uint32_t lo, hi;
+/* We cannot use "=A", since this would use %rax on x86_64 */
+__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=a" (lo), "=d" (hi));
+return (uint64_t)hi << 32 | lo;
+}
+
+int should_segv = 0;
+
+void sigsegv_cb(int sig)
+{
+	if (!should_segv)
+	{
+		fprintf(stderr, "FATAL ERROR, rdtsc() failed while enabled\n");
+		exit(0);
+	}
+	if (prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_ENABLE) < 0)
+	{
+		perror("prctl");
+		exit(0);
+	}
+	should_segv = 0;
+
+	rdtsc();
+}
+
+void task(void)
+{
+	signal(SIGSEGV, sigsegv_cb);
+	alarm(10);
+	for(;;)
+	{
+		rdtsc();
+		if (should_segv)
+		{
+			fprintf(stderr, "FATAL ERROR, rdtsc() succeeded while disabled\n");
+			exit(0);
+		}
+		if (prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_SIGSEGV) < 0)
+		{
+			perror("prctl");
+			exit(0);
+		}
+		should_segv = 1;
+	}
+}
+
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	int n_tasks = 100, i;
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "[No further output means we're allright]\n");
+
+	for (i=0; i<n_tasks; i++)
+		if (fork() == 0)
+			task();
+
+	for (i=0; i<n_tasks; i++)
+		wait(NULL);
+
+	exit(0);
+}
+

Documentation/prctl/disable-tsc-test.c

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+/*
+ * Tests for prctl(PR_GET_TSC, ...) / prctl(PR_SET_TSC, ...)
+ *
+ * Basic test to test behaviour of PR_GET_TSC and PR_SET_TSC
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <inttypes.h>
+
+
+#include <sys/prctl.h>
+#include <linux/prctl.h>
+
+/* Get/set the process' ability to use the timestamp counter instruction */
+#ifndef PR_GET_TSC
+#define PR_GET_TSC 25
+#define PR_SET_TSC 26
+# define PR_TSC_ENABLE		1   /* allow the use of the timestamp counter */
+# define PR_TSC_SIGSEGV		2   /* throw a SIGSEGV instead of reading the TSC */
+#endif
+
+const char *tsc_names[] =
+{
+	[0] = "[not set]",
+	[PR_TSC_ENABLE] = "PR_TSC_ENABLE",
+	[PR_TSC_SIGSEGV] = "PR_TSC_SIGSEGV",
+};
+
+uint64_t rdtsc() {
+uint32_t lo, hi;
+/* We cannot use "=A", since this would use %rax on x86_64 */
+__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=a" (lo), "=d" (hi));
+return (uint64_t)hi << 32 | lo;
+}
+
+void sigsegv_cb(int sig)
+{
+	int tsc_val = 0;
+
+	printf("[ SIG_SEGV ]\n");
+	printf("prctl(PR_GET_TSC, &tsc_val); ");
+	fflush(stdout);
+
+	if ( prctl(PR_GET_TSC, &tsc_val) == -1)
+		perror("prctl");
+
+	printf("tsc_val == %s\n", tsc_names[tsc_val]);
+	printf("prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_ENABLE)\n");
+	fflush(stdout);
+	if ( prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_ENABLE) == -1)
+		perror("prctl");
+
+	printf("rdtsc() == ");
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	int tsc_val = 0;
+
+	signal(SIGSEGV, sigsegv_cb);
+
+	printf("rdtsc() == %llu\n", (unsigned long long)rdtsc());
+	printf("prctl(PR_GET_TSC, &tsc_val); ");
+	fflush(stdout);
+
+	if ( prctl(PR_GET_TSC, &tsc_val) == -1)
+		perror("prctl");
+
+	printf("tsc_val == %s\n", tsc_names[tsc_val]);
+	printf("rdtsc() == %llu\n", (unsigned long long)rdtsc());
+	printf("prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_ENABLE)\n");
+	fflush(stdout);
+
+	if ( prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_ENABLE) == -1)
+		perror("prctl");
+
+	printf("rdtsc() == %llu\n", (unsigned long long)rdtsc());
+	printf("prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_SIGSEGV)\n");
+	fflush(stdout);
+
+	if ( prctl(PR_SET_TSC, PR_TSC_SIGSEGV) == -1)
+		perror("prctl");
+
+	printf("rdtsc() == ");
+	fflush(stdout);
+	printf("%llu\n", (unsigned long long)rdtsc());
+	fflush(stdout);
+
+	exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
+}
+

Documentation/s390/kvm.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+*** BIG FAT WARNING ***
+The kvm module is currently in EXPERIMENTAL state for s390. This means that
+the interface to the module is not yet considered to remain stable. Thus, be
+prepared that we keep breaking your userspace application and guest
+compatibility over and over again until we feel happy with the result. Make sure
+your guest kernel, your host kernel, and your userspace launcher are in a
+consistent state.
+
+This Documentation describes the unique ioctl calls to /dev/kvm, the resulting
+kvm-vm file descriptors, and the kvm-vcpu file descriptors that differ from x86.
+
+1. ioctl calls to /dev/kvm
+KVM does support the following ioctls on s390 that are common with other
+architectures and do behave the same:
+KVM_GET_API_VERSION
+KVM_CREATE_VM		(*) see note
+KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION
+KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE
+
+Notes:
+* KVM_CREATE_VM may fail on s390, if the calling process has multiple
+threads and has not called KVM_S390_ENABLE_SIE before.
+
+In addition, on s390 the following architecture specific ioctls are supported:
+ioctl:		KVM_S390_ENABLE_SIE
+args:		none
+see also:	include/linux/kvm.h
+This call causes the kernel to switch on PGSTE in the user page table. This
+operation is needed in order to run a virtual machine, and it requires the
+calling process to be single-threaded. Note that the first call to KVM_CREATE_VM
+will implicitly try to switch on PGSTE if the user process has not called
+KVM_S390_ENABLE_SIE before. User processes that want to launch multiple threads
+before creating a virtual machine have to call KVM_S390_ENABLE_SIE, or will
+observe an error calling KVM_CREATE_VM. Switching on PGSTE is a one-time
+operation, is not reversible, and will persist over the entire lifetime of
+the calling process. It does not have any user-visible effect other than a small
+performance penalty.
+
+2. ioctl calls to the kvm-vm file descriptor
+KVM does support the following ioctls on s390 that are common with other
+architectures and do behave the same:
+KVM_CREATE_VCPU
+KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION      (*) see note
+KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG		(**) see note
+
+Notes:
+*  kvm does only allow exactly one memory slot on s390, which has to start
+   at guest absolute address zero and at a user address that is aligned on any
+   page boundary. This hardware "limitation" allows us to have a few unique
+   optimizations. The memory slot doesn't have to be filled
+   with memory actually, it may contain sparse holes. That said, with different
+   user memory layout this does still allow a large flexibility when
+   doing the guest memory setup.
+** KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG doesn't work properly yet. The user will receive an empty
+log. This ioctl call is only needed for guest migration, and we intend to
+implement this one in the future.
+
+In addition, on s390 the following architecture specific ioctls for the kvm-vm
+file descriptor are supported:
+ioctl:		KVM_S390_INTERRUPT
+args:		struct kvm_s390_interrupt *
+see also:	include/linux/kvm.h
+This ioctl is used to submit a floating interrupt for a virtual machine.
+Floating interrupts may be delivered to any virtual cpu in the configuration.
+Only some interrupt types defined in include/linux/kvm.h make sense when
+submitted as floating interrupts. The following interrupts are not considered
+to be useful as floating interrupts, and a call to inject them will result in
+-EINVAL error code: program interrupts and interprocessor signals. Valid
+floating interrupts are:
+KVM_S390_INT_VIRTIO
+KVM_S390_INT_SERVICE
+
+3. ioctl calls to the kvm-vcpu file descriptor
+KVM does support the following ioctls on s390 that are common with other
+architectures and do behave the same:
+KVM_RUN
+KVM_GET_REGS
+KVM_SET_REGS
+KVM_GET_SREGS
+KVM_SET_SREGS
+KVM_GET_FPU
+KVM_SET_FPU
+
+In addition, on s390 the following architecture specific ioctls for the
+kvm-vcpu file descriptor are supported:
+ioctl:		KVM_S390_INTERRUPT
+args:		struct kvm_s390_interrupt *
+see also:	include/linux/kvm.h
+This ioctl is used to submit an interrupt for a specific virtual cpu.
+Only some interrupt types defined in include/linux/kvm.h make sense when
+submitted for a specific cpu. The following interrupts are not considered
+to be useful, and a call to inject them will result in -EINVAL error code:
+service processor calls and virtio interrupts. Valid interrupt types are:
+KVM_S390_PROGRAM_INT
+KVM_S390_SIGP_STOP
+KVM_S390_RESTART
+KVM_S390_SIGP_SET_PREFIX
+KVM_S390_INT_EMERGENCY
+
+ioctl:		KVM_S390_STORE_STATUS
+args:		unsigned long
+see also:	include/linux/kvm.h
+This ioctl stores the state of the cpu at the guest real address given as
+argument, unless one of the following values defined in include/linux/kvm.h
+is given as arguement:
+KVM_S390_STORE_STATUS_NOADDR - the CPU stores its status to the save area in
+absolute lowcore as defined by the principles of operation
+KVM_S390_STORE_STATUS_PREFIXED - the CPU stores its status to the save area in
+its prefix page just like the dump tool that comes with zipl. This is useful
+to create a system dump for use with lkcdutils or crash.
+
+ioctl:		KVM_S390_SET_INITIAL_PSW
+args:		struct kvm_s390_psw *
+see also:	include/linux/kvm.h
+This ioctl can be used to set the processor status word (psw) of a stopped cpu
+prior to running it with KVM_RUN. Note that this call is not required to modify
+the psw during sie intercepts that fall back to userspace because struct kvm_run
+does contain the psw, and this value is evaluated during reentry of KVM_RUN
+after the intercept exit was recognized.
+
+ioctl:		KVM_S390_INITIAL_RESET
+args:		none
+see also:	include/linux/kvm.h
+This ioctl can be used to perform an initial cpu reset as defined by the
+principles of operation. The target cpu has to be in stopped state.

Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt

@@ -115,6 +115,27 @@ Return Value: Handle for generated debug area
 Description:  Allocates memory for a debug log     
               Must not be called within an interrupt handler 
 
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+debug_info_t *debug_register_mode(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
+				  int buf_size, mode_t mode, uid_t uid,
+				  gid_t gid);
+
+Parameter:    name:	   Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
+	      pages:	   Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
+	      nr_areas:    Number of debug areas
+	      buf_size:    Size of data area in each debug entry
+	      mode:	   File mode for debugfs files. E.g. S_IRWXUGO
+	      uid:	   User ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
+			   supported.
+	      gid:	   Group ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
+			   supported.
+
+Return Value: Handle for generated debug area
+	      NULL if register failed
+
+Description:  Allocates memory for a debug log
+	      Must not be called within an interrupt handler
+
 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 void debug_unregister (debug_info_t * id);
 

Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt

@@ -1,59 +1,177 @@
+				Real-Time group scheduling
+				--------------------------
 
+CONTENTS
+========
 
-Real-Time group scheduling.
+1. Overview
+  1.1 The problem
+  1.2 The solution
+2. The interface
+  2.1 System-wide settings
+  2.2 Default behaviour
+  2.3 Basis for grouping tasks
+3. Future plans
 
-The problem space:
 
-In order to schedule multiple groups of realtime tasks each group must
-be assigned a fixed portion of the CPU time available. Without a minimum
-guarantee a realtime group can obviously fall short. A fuzzy upper limit
-is of no use since it cannot be relied upon. Which leaves us with just
-the single fixed portion.
+1. Overview
+===========
 
-CPU time is divided by means of specifying how much time can be spent
-running in a given period. Say a frame fixed realtime renderer must
-deliver 25 frames a second, which yields a period of 0.04s. Now say
-it will also have to play some music and respond to input, leaving it
-with around 80% for the graphics. We can then give this group a runtime
-of 0.8 * 0.04s = 0.032s.
 
-This way the graphics group will have a 0.04s period with a 0.032s runtime
-limit.
+1.1 The problem
+---------------
 
-Now if the audio thread needs to refill the DMA buffer every 0.005s, but
-needs only about 3% CPU time to do so, it can do with a 0.03 * 0.005s
-= 0.00015s.
+Realtime scheduling is all about determinism, a group has to be able to rely on
+the amount of bandwidth (eg. CPU time) being constant. In order to schedule
+multiple groups of realtime tasks, each group must be assigned a fixed portion
+of the CPU time available.  Without a minimum guarantee a realtime group can
+obviously fall short. A fuzzy upper limit is of no use since it cannot be
+relied upon. Which leaves us with just the single fixed portion.
 
+1.2 The solution
+----------------
 
-The Interface:
+CPU time is divided by means of specifying how much time can be spent running
+in a given period. We allocate this "run time" for each realtime group which
+the other realtime groups will not be permitted to use.
 
-system wide:
+Any time not allocated to a realtime group will be used to run normal priority
+tasks (SCHED_OTHER). Any allocated run time not used will also be picked up by
+SCHED_OTHER.
 
-/proc/sys/kernel/sched_rt_period_ms
-/proc/sys/kernel/sched_rt_runtime_us
+Let's consider an example: a frame fixed realtime renderer must deliver 25
+frames a second, which yields a period of 0.04s per frame. Now say it will also
+have to play some music and respond to input, leaving it with around 80% CPU
+time dedicated for the graphics. We can then give this group a run time of 0.8
+* 0.04s = 0.032s.
 
-CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED
+This way the graphics group will have a 0.04s period with a 0.032s run time
+limit. Now if the audio thread needs to refill the DMA buffer every 0.005s, but
+needs only about 3% CPU time to do so, it can do with a 0.03 * 0.005s =
+0.00015s. So this group can be scheduled with a period of 0.005s and a run time
+of 0.00015s.
 
-/sys/kernel/uids/<uid>/cpu_rt_runtime_us
+The remaining CPU time will be used for user input and other tass. Because
+realtime tasks have explicitly allocated the CPU time they need to perform
+their tasks, buffer underruns in the graphocs or audio can be eliminated.
 
-or
+NOTE: the above example is not fully implemented as of yet (2.6.25). We still
+lack an EDF scheduler to make non-uniform periods usable.
 
-CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED
 
-/cgroup/<cgroup>/cpu.rt_runtime_us
+2. The Interface
+================
 
-[ time is specified in us because the interface is s32; this gives an
-  operating range of ~35m to 1us ]
 
-The period takes values in [ 1, INT_MAX ], runtime in [ -1, INT_MAX - 1 ].
+2.1 System wide settings
+------------------------
 
-A runtime of -1 specifies runtime == period, ie. no limit.
+The system wide settings are configured under the /proc virtual file system:
 
-New groups get the period from /proc/sys/kernel/sched_rt_period_us and
-a runtime of 0.
+/proc/sys/kernel/sched_rt_period_us:
+  The scheduling period that is equivalent to 100% CPU bandwidth
 
-Settings are constrained to:
+/proc/sys/kernel/sched_rt_runtime_us:
+  A global limit on how much time realtime scheduling may use.  Even without
+  CONFIG_RT_GROUP_SCHED enabled, this will limit time reserved to realtime
+  processes. With CONFIG_RT_GROUP_SCHED it signifies the total bandwidth
+  available to all realtime groups.
+
+  * Time is specified in us because the interface is s32. This gives an
+    operating range from 1us to about 35 minutes.
+  * sched_rt_period_us takes values from 1 to INT_MAX.
+  * sched_rt_runtime_us takes values from -1 to (INT_MAX - 1).
+  * A run time of -1 specifies runtime == period, ie. no limit.
+
+
+2.2 Default behaviour
+---------------------
+
+The default values for sched_rt_period_us (1000000 or 1s) and
+sched_rt_runtime_us (950000 or 0.95s).  This gives 0.05s to be used by
+SCHED_OTHER (non-RT tasks). These defaults were chosen so that a run-away
+realtime tasks will not lock up the machine but leave a little time to recover
+it.  By setting runtime to -1 you'd get the old behaviour back.
+
+By default all bandwidth is assigned to the root group and new groups get the
+period from /proc/sys/kernel/sched_rt_period_us and a run time of 0. If you
+want to assign bandwidth to another group, reduce the root group's bandwidth
+and assign some or all of the difference to another group.
+
+Realtime group scheduling means you have to assign a portion of total CPU
+bandwidth to the group before it will accept realtime tasks. Therefore you will
+not be able to run realtime tasks as any user other than root until you have
+done that, even if the user has the rights to run processes with realtime
+priority!
+
+
+2.3 Basis for grouping tasks
+----------------------------
+
+There are two compile-time settings for allocating CPU bandwidth. These are
+configured using the "Basis for grouping tasks" multiple choice menu under
+General setup > Group CPU Scheduler:
+
+a. CONFIG_USER_SCHED (aka "Basis for grouping tasks" =  "user id")
+
+This lets you use the virtual files under
+"/sys/kernel/uids/<uid>/cpu_rt_runtime_us" to control he CPU time reserved for
+each user .
+
+The other option is:
+
+.o CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED (aka "Basis for grouping tasks" = "Control groups")
+
+This uses the /cgroup virtual file system and "/cgroup/<cgroup>/cpu.rt_runtime_us"
+to control the CPU time reserved for each control group instead.
+
+For more information on working with control groups, you should read
+Documentation/cgroups.txt as well.
+
+Group settings are checked against the following limits in order to keep the configuration
+schedulable:
 
    \Sum_{i} runtime_{i} / global_period <= global_runtime / global_period
 
-in order to keep the configuration schedulable.
+For now, this can be simplified to just the following (but see Future plans):
+
+   \Sum_{i} runtime_{i} <= global_runtime
+
+
+3. Future plans
+===============
+
+There is work in progress to make the scheduling period for each group
+("/sys/kernel/uids/<uid>/cpu_rt_period_us" or
+"/cgroup/<cgroup>/cpu.rt_period_us" respectively) configurable as well.
+
+The constraint on the period is that a subgroup must have a smaller or
+equal period to its parent. But realistically its not very useful _yet_
+as its prone to starvation without deadline scheduling.
+
+Consider two sibling groups A and B; both have 50% bandwidth, but A's
+period is twice the length of B's.
+
+* group A: period=100000us, runtime=10000us
+	- this runs for 0.01s once every 0.1s
+
+* group B: period= 50000us, runtime=10000us
+	- this runs for 0.01s twice every 0.1s (or once every 0.05 sec).
+
+This means that currently a while (1) loop in A will run for the full period of
+B and can starve B's tasks (assuming they are of lower priority) for a whole
+period.
+
+The next project will be SCHED_EDF (Earliest Deadline First scheduling) to bring
+full deadline scheduling to the linux kernel. Deadline scheduling the above
+groups and treating end of the period as a deadline will ensure that they both
+get their allocated time.
+
+Implementing SCHED_EDF might take a while to complete. Priority Inheritance is
+the biggest challenge as the current linux PI infrastructure is geared towards
+the limited static priority levels 0-139. With deadline scheduling you need to
+do deadline inheritance (since priority is inversely proportional to the
+deadline delta (deadline - now).
+
+This means the whole PI machinery will have to be reworked - and that is one of
+the most complex pieces of code we have.

Documentation/scsi/st.txt

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ This file contains brief information about the SCSI tape driver.
 The driver is currently maintained by Kai Mäkisara (email
 Kai.Makisara@kolumbus.fi)
 
-Last modified: Mon Mar  7 21:14:44 2005 by kai.makisara
+Last modified: Sun Feb 24 21:59:07 2008 by kai.makisara
 
 
 BASICS
@@ -133,6 +133,11 @@ the defaults set by the user. The value -1 means the default is not set. The
 file 'dev' contains the device numbers corresponding to this device. The links
 'device' and 'driver' point to the SCSI device and driver entries.
 
+Each directory also contains the entry 'options' which shows the currently
+enabled driver and mode options. The value in the file is a bit mask where the
+bit definitions are the same as those used with MTSETDRVBUFFER in setting the
+options.
+
 A link named 'tape' is made from the SCSI device directory to the class
 directory corresponding to the mode 0 auto-rewind device (e.g., st0). 
 
@@ -372,6 +377,11 @@ MTSETDRVBUFFER
 	     MT_ST_SYSV sets the SYSV semantics (mode)
 	     MT_ST_NOWAIT enables immediate mode (i.e., don't wait for
 	        the command to finish) for some commands (e.g., rewind)
+	     MT_ST_SILI enables setting the SILI bit in SCSI commands when
+		reading in variable block mode to enhance performance when
+		reading blocks shorter than the byte count; set this only
+		if you are sure that the drive supports SILI and the HBA
+		correctly returns transfer residuals
 	     MT_ST_DEBUGGING debugging (global; debugging must be
 		compiled into the driver)
 	MT_ST_SETBOOLEANS

Documentation/smart-config.txt

@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
-Smart CONFIG_* Dependencies
-1 August 1999
-
-Michael Chastain   <mec@shout.net>
-Werner Almesberger <almesber@lrc.di.epfl.ch>
-Martin von Loewis  <martin@mira.isdn.cs.tu-berlin.de>
-
-Here is the problem:
-
-    Suppose that drivers/net/foo.c has the following lines:
-
-	#include <linux/config.h>
-
-	...
-
-	#ifdef CONFIG_FOO_AUTOFROB
-	    /* Code for auto-frobbing */
-	#else
-	    /* Manual frobbing only */
-	#endif
-
-	...
-
-	#ifdef CONFIG_FOO_MODEL_TWO
-	    /* Code for model two */
-	#endif
-
-    Now suppose the user (the person building kernels) reconfigures the
-    kernel to change some unrelated setting.  This will regenerate the
-    file include/linux/autoconf.h, which will cause include/linux/config.h
-    to be out of date, which will cause drivers/net/foo.c to be recompiled.
-
-    Most kernel sources, perhaps 80% of them, have at least one CONFIG_*
-    dependency somewhere.  So changing _any_ CONFIG_* setting requires
-    almost _all_ of the kernel to be recompiled.
-
-Here is the solution:
-
-    We've made the dependency generator, mkdep.c, smarter.  Instead of
-    generating this dependency:
-
-	drivers/net/foo.c: include/linux/config.h
-
-    It now generates these dependencies:
-
-	drivers/net/foo.c: \
-	    include/config/foo/autofrob.h \
-	    include/config/foo/model/two.h
-
-    So drivers/net/foo.c depends only on the CONFIG_* lines that
-    it actually uses.
-
-    A new program, split-include.c, runs at the beginning of
-    compilation (make bzImage or make zImage).  split-include reads
-    include/linux/autoconf.h and updates the include/config/ tree,
-    writing one file per option.  It updates only the files for options
-    that have changed.
-
-Flag Dependencies
-
-    Martin Von Loewis contributed another feature to this patch:
-    'flag dependencies'.  The idea is that a .o file depends on
-    the compilation flags used to build it.  The file foo.o has
-    its flags stored in .flags.foo.o.
-
-    Suppose the user changes the foo driver from resident to modular.
-    'make' will notice that the current foo.o was not compiled with
-    -DMODULE and will recompile foo.c.
-
-    All .o files made from C source have flag dependencies.  So do .o
-    files made with ld, and .a files made with ar.  However, .o files
-    made from assembly source do not have flag dependencies (nobody
-    needs this yet, but it would be good to fix).
-
-Per-source-file Flags
-
-    Flag dependencies also work with per-source-file flags.
-    You can specify compilation flags for individual source files
-    like this:
-
-	CFLAGS_foo.o = -DSPECIAL_FOO_DEFINE
-
-    This helps clean up drivers/net/Makefile, drivers/scsi/Makefile,
-    and several other Makefiles.
-
-Credit
-
-    Werner Almesberger had the original idea and wrote the first
-    version of this patch.
-    
-    Michael Chastain picked it up and continued development.  He is
-    now the principal author and maintainer.  Please report any bugs
-    to him.
-
-    Martin von Loewis wrote flag dependencies, with some modifications
-    by Michael Chastain.
-
-    Thanks to all of the beta testers.

Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt

@@ -284,6 +284,13 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
            control correctly. If you have problems regarding this, try
            another ALSA compliant mixer (alsamixer works).
 
+  Module snd-aw2
+  --------------
+
+    Module for Audiowerk2 sound card
+
+    This module supports multiple cards.
+
   Module snd-azt2320
   ------------------
 
@@ -818,19 +825,25 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 	  hippo_1	Hippo (Benq) with jack detection
 	  sony-assamd	Sony ASSAMD
 	  ultra		Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model
+	  lenovo-3000	Lenovo 3000 y410
 	  basic		fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF
 	  auto		auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
-	ALC268
+	ALC267/268
+	  quanta-il1	Quanta IL1 mini-notebook
 	  3stack	3-stack model
 	  toshiba	Toshiba A205
 	  acer		Acer laptops
 	  dell		Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200)
+	  zepto		Zepto laptops
 	  test		for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can
 			adjusted.  Appearing only when compiled with
 			$CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y
 	  auto		auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
+	ALC269
+	  basic		Basic preset
+
 	ALC662
 	  3stack-dig	3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF
 	  3stack-6ch	 3-stack (6-channel)
@@ -871,10 +884,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 	  lenovo-nb0763	Lenovo NB0763
 	  lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195
 	  haier-w66	Haier W66
-	  6stack-hp	HP machines with 6stack (Nettle boards)
 	  3stack-hp	HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards)
 	  6stack-dell	Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530)
 	  mitac		Mitac 8252D
+	  clevo-m720	Clevo M720 laptop series
+	  fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515
 	  auto		auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
 	ALC861/660
@@ -911,6 +925,12 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 	  3stack	3-stack mode (default)
 	  6stack	6-stack mode
 
+	AD1884A / AD1883 / AD1984A / AD1984B
+	  desktop	3-stack desktop (default)
+	  laptop	laptop with HP jack sensing
+	  mobile	mobile devices with HP jack sensing
+	  thinkpad	Lenovo Thinkpad X300
+
 	AD1884
 	  N/A
 
@@ -936,7 +956,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 	  laptop-automute 2-channel with EAPD and HP-automute (Lenovo N100)
 	  ultra		2-channel with EAPD (Samsung Ultra tablet PC)
 
-	AD1988
+	AD1988/AD1988B/AD1989A/AD1989B
 	  6stack	6-jack
 	  6stack-dig	ditto with SPDIF
 	  3stack	3-jack
@@ -979,6 +999,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 	  dell-m26	Dell Inspiron 1501
 	  dell-m27	Dell Inspiron E1705/9400
 	  gateway	Gateway laptops with EAPD control
+	  panasonic	Panasonic CF-74
 
 	STAC9205/9254
 	  ref		Reference board
@@ -1017,6 +1038,16 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 	  3stack	D965 3stack
 	  5stack	D965 5stack + SPDIF
 	  dell-3stack	Dell Dimension E520
+	  dell-bios	Fixes with Dell BIOS setup
+
+	STAC92HD71B*
+	  ref		Reference board
+	  dell-m4-1	Dell desktops
+	  dell-m4-2	Dell desktops
+
+	STAC92HD73*
+	  ref		Reference board
+	  dell-m6	Dell desktops
 
 	STAC9872
 	  vaio		Setup for VAIO FE550G/SZ110
@@ -1590,6 +1621,16 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     Power management is _not_ supported.
 
+  Module snd-pcsp
+  -----------------
+
+    Module for internal PC-Speaker.
+
+    nforce_wa	- enable NForce chipset workaround. Expect bad sound.
+
+    This module supports system beeps, some kind of PCM playback and
+    even a few mixer controls.
+
   Module snd-pcxhr
   ----------------
 

Documentation/spi/spidev

@@ -126,8 +126,8 @@ NOTES:
 FULL DUPLEX CHARACTER DEVICE API
 ================================
 
-See the sample program below for one example showing the use of the full
-duplex programming interface.  (Although it doesn't perform a full duplex
+See the spidev_fdx.c sample program for one example showing the use of the
+full duplex programming interface.  (Although it doesn't perform a full duplex
 transfer.)  The model is the same as that used in the kernel spi_sync()
 request; the individual transfers offer the same capabilities as are
 available to kernel drivers (except that it's not asynchronous).
@@ -141,167 +141,3 @@ and bitrate for each transfer segment.)
 
 To make a full duplex request, provide both rx_buf and tx_buf for the
 same transfer.  It's even OK if those are the same buffer.
-
-
-SAMPLE PROGRAM
-==============
-
---------------------------------	CUT HERE
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <string.h>
-
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-
-#include <linux/types.h>
-#include <linux/spi/spidev.h>
-
-
-static int verbose;
-
-static void do_read(int fd, int len)
-{
-	unsigned char	buf[32], *bp;
-	int		status;
-
-	/* read at least 2 bytes, no more than 32 */
-	if (len < 2)
-		len = 2;
-	else if (len > sizeof(buf))
-		len = sizeof(buf);
-	memset(buf, 0, sizeof buf);
-
-	status = read(fd, buf, len);
-	if (status < 0) {
-		perror("read");
-		return;
-	}
-	if (status != len) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "short read\n");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printf("read(%2d, %2d): %02x %02x,", len, status,
-		buf[0], buf[1]);
-	status -= 2;
-	bp = buf + 2;
-	while (status-- > 0)
-		printf(" %02x", *bp++);
-	printf("\n");
-}
-
-static void do_msg(int fd, int len)
-{
-	struct spi_ioc_transfer	xfer[2];
-	unsigned char		buf[32], *bp;
-	int			status;
-
-	memset(xfer, 0, sizeof xfer);
-	memset(buf, 0, sizeof buf);
-
-	if (len > sizeof buf)
-		len = sizeof buf;
-
-	buf[0] = 0xaa;
-	xfer[0].tx_buf = (__u64) buf;
-	xfer[0].len = 1;
-
-	xfer[1].rx_buf = (__u64) buf;
-	xfer[1].len = len;
-
-	status = ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_MESSAGE(2), xfer);
-	if (status < 0) {
-		perror("SPI_IOC_MESSAGE");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printf("response(%2d, %2d): ", len, status);
-	for (bp = buf; len; len--)
-		printf(" %02x", *bp++);
-	printf("\n");
-}
-
-static void dumpstat(const char *name, int fd)
-{
-	__u8	mode, lsb, bits;
-	__u32	speed;
-
-	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_MODE, &mode) < 0) {
-		perror("SPI rd_mode");
-		return;
-	}
-	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_LSB_FIRST, &lsb) < 0) {
-		perror("SPI rd_lsb_fist");
-		return;
-	}
-	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_BITS_PER_WORD, &bits) < 0) {
-		perror("SPI bits_per_word");
-		return;
-	}
-	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_MAX_SPEED_HZ, &speed) < 0) {
-		perror("SPI max_speed_hz");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	printf("%s: spi mode %d, %d bits %sper word, %d Hz max\n",
-		name, mode, bits, lsb ? "(lsb first) " : "", speed);
-}
-
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
-{
-	int		c;
-	int		readcount = 0;
-	int		msglen = 0;
-	int		fd;
-	const char	*name;
-
-	while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "hm:r:v")) != EOF) {
-		switch (c) {
-		case 'm':
-			msglen = atoi(optarg);
-			if (msglen < 0)
-				goto usage;
-			continue;
-		case 'r':
-			readcount = atoi(optarg);
-			if (readcount < 0)
-				goto usage;
-			continue;
-		case 'v':
-			verbose++;
-			continue;
-		case 'h':
-		case '?':
-usage:
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"usage: %s [-h] [-m N] [-r N] /dev/spidevB.D\n",
-				argv[0]);
-			return 1;
-		}
-	}
-
-	if ((optind + 1) != argc)
-		goto usage;
-	name = argv[optind];
-
-	fd = open(name, O_RDWR);
-	if (fd < 0) {
-		perror("open");
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-	dumpstat(name, fd);
-
-	if (msglen)
-		do_msg(fd, msglen);
-
-	if (readcount)
-		do_read(fd, readcount);
-
-	close(fd);
-	return 0;
-}

Documentation/spi/spidev_fdx.c

@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+#include <linux/types.h>
+#include <linux/spi/spidev.h>
+
+
+static int verbose;
+
+static void do_read(int fd, int len)
+{
+	unsigned char	buf[32], *bp;
+	int		status;
+
+	/* read at least 2 bytes, no more than 32 */
+	if (len < 2)
+		len = 2;
+	else if (len > sizeof(buf))
+		len = sizeof(buf);
+	memset(buf, 0, sizeof buf);
+
+	status = read(fd, buf, len);
+	if (status < 0) {
+		perror("read");
+		return;
+	}
+	if (status != len) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "short read\n");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf("read(%2d, %2d): %02x %02x,", len, status,
+		buf[0], buf[1]);
+	status -= 2;
+	bp = buf + 2;
+	while (status-- > 0)
+		printf(" %02x", *bp++);
+	printf("\n");
+}
+
+static void do_msg(int fd, int len)
+{
+	struct spi_ioc_transfer	xfer[2];
+	unsigned char		buf[32], *bp;
+	int			status;
+
+	memset(xfer, 0, sizeof xfer);
+	memset(buf, 0, sizeof buf);
+
+	if (len > sizeof buf)
+		len = sizeof buf;
+
+	buf[0] = 0xaa;
+	xfer[0].tx_buf = (__u64) buf;
+	xfer[0].len = 1;
+
+	xfer[1].rx_buf = (__u64) buf;
+	xfer[1].len = len;
+
+	status = ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_MESSAGE(2), xfer);
+	if (status < 0) {
+		perror("SPI_IOC_MESSAGE");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf("response(%2d, %2d): ", len, status);
+	for (bp = buf; len; len--)
+		printf(" %02x", *bp++);
+	printf("\n");
+}
+
+static void dumpstat(const char *name, int fd)
+{
+	__u8	mode, lsb, bits;
+	__u32	speed;
+
+	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_MODE, &mode) < 0) {
+		perror("SPI rd_mode");
+		return;
+	}
+	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_LSB_FIRST, &lsb) < 0) {
+		perror("SPI rd_lsb_fist");
+		return;
+	}
+	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_BITS_PER_WORD, &bits) < 0) {
+		perror("SPI bits_per_word");
+		return;
+	}
+	if (ioctl(fd, SPI_IOC_RD_MAX_SPEED_HZ, &speed) < 0) {
+		perror("SPI max_speed_hz");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf("%s: spi mode %d, %d bits %sper word, %d Hz max\n",
+		name, mode, bits, lsb ? "(lsb first) " : "", speed);
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	int		c;
+	int		readcount = 0;
+	int		msglen = 0;
+	int		fd;
+	const char	*name;
+
+	while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "hm:r:v")) != EOF) {
+		switch (c) {
+		case 'm':
+			msglen = atoi(optarg);
+			if (msglen < 0)
+				goto usage;
+			continue;
+		case 'r':
+			readcount = atoi(optarg);
+			if (readcount < 0)
+				goto usage;
+			continue;
+		case 'v':
+			verbose++;
+			continue;
+		case 'h':
+		case '?':
+usage:
+			fprintf(stderr,
+				"usage: %s [-h] [-m N] [-r N] /dev/spidevB.D\n",
+				argv[0]);
+			return 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if ((optind + 1) != argc)
+		goto usage;
+	name = argv[optind];
+
+	fd = open(name, O_RDWR);
+	if (fd < 0) {
+		perror("open");
+		return 1;
+	}
+
+	dumpstat(name, fd);
+
+	if (msglen)
+		do_msg(fd, msglen);
+
+	if (readcount)
+		do_read(fd, readcount);
+
+	close(fd);
+	return 0;
+}

Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt

@@ -108,10 +108,12 @@ and throttle appropriate devices.
 RO	read only value
 RW	read/write value
 
-All thermal sysfs attributes will be represented under /sys/class/thermal
+Thermal sysfs attributes will be represented under /sys/class/thermal.
+Hwmon sysfs I/F extension is also available under /sys/class/hwmon
+if hwmon is compiled in or built as a module.
 
 Thermal zone device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
-|thermal_zone[0-*]:
+/sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone[0-*]:
 	|-----type:			Type of the thermal zone
 	|-----temp:			Current temperature
 	|-----mode:			Working mode of the thermal zone
@@ -119,7 +121,7 @@ Thermal zone device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
 	|-----trip_point_[0-*]_type:	Trip point type
 
 Thermal cooling device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
-|cooling_device[0-*]:
+/sys/class/thermal/cooling_device[0-*]:
 	|-----type :			Type of the cooling device(processor/fan/...)
 	|-----max_state:		Maximum cooling state of the cooling device
 	|-----cur_state:		Current cooling state of the cooling device
@@ -130,10 +132,19 @@ They represent the relationship between a thermal zone and its associated coolin
 They are created/removed for each
 thermal_zone_bind_cooling_device/thermal_zone_unbind_cooling_device successful execution.
 
-|thermal_zone[0-*]
+/sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone[0-*]
 	|-----cdev[0-*]:		The [0-*]th cooling device in the current thermal zone
 	|-----cdev[0-*]_trip_point:	Trip point that cdev[0-*] is associated with
 
+Besides the thermal zone device sysfs I/F and cooling device sysfs I/F,
+the generic thermal driver also creates a hwmon sysfs I/F for each _type_ of
+thermal zone device. E.g. the generic thermal driver registers one hwmon class device
+and build the associated hwmon sysfs I/F for all the registered ACPI thermal zones.
+/sys/class/hwmon/hwmon[0-*]:
+	|-----name:			The type of the thermal zone devices.
+	|-----temp[1-*]_input:		The current temperature of thermal zone [1-*].
+	|-----temp[1-*]_critical:	The critical trip point of thermal zone [1-*].
+Please read Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface for additional information.
 
 ***************************
 * Thermal zone attributes *
@@ -141,7 +152,10 @@ thermal_zone_bind_cooling_device/thermal_zone_unbind_cooling_device successful e
 
 type				Strings which represent the thermal zone type.
 				This is given by thermal zone driver as part of registration.
-				Eg: "ACPI thermal zone" indicates it's a ACPI thermal device
+				Eg: "acpitz" indicates it's an ACPI thermal device.
+				In order to keep it consistent with hwmon sys attribute,
+				this should be a short, lowercase string,
+				not containing spaces nor dashes.
 				RO
 				Required
 
@@ -218,7 +232,7 @@ the sys I/F structure will be built like this:
 /sys/class/thermal:
 
 |thermal_zone1:
-	|-----type:			ACPI thermal zone
+	|-----type:			acpitz
 	|-----temp:			37000
 	|-----mode:			kernel
 	|-----trip_point_0_temp:	100000
@@ -243,3 +257,10 @@ the sys I/F structure will be built like this:
 	|-----type:			Fan
 	|-----max_state:		2
 	|-----cur_state:		0
+
+/sys/class/hwmon:
+
+|hwmon0:
+	|-----name:			acpitz
+	|-----temp1_input:		37000
+	|-----temp1_crit:		100000

Documentation/usb/anchors.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+What is anchor?
+===============
+
+A USB driver needs to support some callbacks requiring
+a driver to cease all IO to an interface. To do so, a
+driver has to keep track of the URBs it has submitted
+to know they've all completed or to call usb_kill_urb
+for them. The anchor is a data structure takes care of
+keeping track of URBs and provides methods to deal with
+multiple URBs.
+
+Allocation and Initialisation
+=============================
+
+There's no API to allocate an anchor. It is simply declared
+as struct usb_anchor. init_usb_anchor() must be called to
+initialise the data structure.
+
+Deallocation
+============
+
+Once it has no more URBs associated with it, the anchor can be
+freed with normal memory management operations.
+
+Association and disassociation of URBs with anchors
+===================================================
+
+An association of URBs to an anchor is made by an explicit
+call to usb_anchor_urb(). The association is maintained until
+an URB is finished by (successfull) completion. Thus disassociation
+is automatic. A function is provided to forcibly finish (kill)
+all URBs associated with an anchor.
+Furthermore, disassociation can be made with usb_unanchor_urb()
+
+Operations on multitudes of URBs
+================================
+
+usb_kill_anchored_urbs()
+------------------------
+
+This function kills all URBs associated with an anchor. The URBs
+are called in the reverse temporal order they were submitted.
+This way no data can be reordered.
+
+usb_wait_anchor_empty_timeout()
+-------------------------------
+
+This function waits for all URBs associated with an anchor to finish
+or a timeout, whichever comes first. Its return value will tell you
+whether the timeout was reached.

Documentation/usb/callbacks.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+What callbacks will usbcore do?
+===============================
+
+Usbcore will call into a driver through callbacks defined in the driver
+structure and through the completion handler of URBs a driver submits.
+Only the former are in the scope of this document. These two kinds of
+callbacks are completely independent of each other. Information on the
+completion callback can be found in Documentation/usb/URB.txt.
+
+The callbacks defined in the driver structure are:
+
+1. Hotplugging callbacks:
+
+ * @probe: Called to see if the driver is willing to manage a particular
+ *	interface on a device.
+ * @disconnect: Called when the interface is no longer accessible, usually
+ *	because its device has been (or is being) disconnected or the
+ *	driver module is being unloaded.
+
+2. Odd backdoor through usbfs:
+
+ * @ioctl: Used for drivers that want to talk to userspace through
+ *	the "usbfs" filesystem.  This lets devices provide ways to
+ *	expose information to user space regardless of where they
+ *	do (or don't) show up otherwise in the filesystem.
+
+3. Power management (PM) callbacks:
+
+ * @suspend: Called when the device is going to be suspended.
+ * @resume: Called when the device is being resumed.
+ * @reset_resume: Called when the suspended device has been reset instead
+ *	of being resumed.
+
+4. Device level operations:
+
+ * @pre_reset: Called when the device is about to be reset.
+ * @post_reset: Called after the device has been reset
+
+The ioctl interface (2) should be used only if you have a very good
+reason. Sysfs is preferred these days. The PM callbacks are covered
+separately in Documentation/usb/power-management.txt.
+
+Calling conventions
+===================
+
+All callbacks are mutually exclusive. There's no need for locking
+against other USB callbacks. All callbacks are called from a task
+context. You may sleep. However, it is important that all sleeps have a
+small fixed upper limit in time. In particular you must not call out to
+user space and await results.
+
+Hotplugging callbacks
+=====================
+
+These callbacks are intended to associate and disassociate a driver with
+an interface. A driver's bond to an interface is exclusive.
+
+The probe() callback
+--------------------
+
+int (*probe) (struct usb_interface *intf,
+		const struct usb_device_id *id);
+
+Accept or decline an interface. If you accept the device return 0,
+otherwise -ENODEV or -ENXIO. Other error codes should be used only if a
+genuine error occurred during initialisation which prevented a driver
+from accepting a device that would else have been accepted.
+You are strongly encouraged to use usbcore'sfacility,
+usb_set_intfdata(), to associate a data structure with an interface, so
+that you know which internal state and identity you associate with a
+particular interface. The device will not be suspended and you may do IO
+to the interface you are called for and endpoint 0 of the device. Device
+initialisation that doesn't take too long is a good idea here.
+
+The disconnect() callback
+-------------------------
+
+void (*disconnect) (struct usb_interface *intf);
+
+This callback is a signal to break any connection with an interface.
+You are not allowed any IO to a device after returning from this
+callback. You also may not do any other operation that may interfere
+with another driver bound the interface, eg. a power management
+operation.
+If you are called due to a physical disconnection, all your URBs will be
+killed by usbcore. Note that in this case disconnect will be called some
+time after the physical disconnection. Thus your driver must be prepared
+to deal with failing IO even prior to the callback.
+
+Device level callbacks
+======================
+
+pre_reset
+---------
+
+int (*pre_reset)(struct usb_interface *intf);
+
+Another driver or user space is triggering a reset on the device which
+contains the interface passed as an argument. Cease IO and save any
+device state you need to restore.
+
+If you need to allocate memory here, use GFP_NOIO or GFP_ATOMIC, if you
+are in atomic context.
+
+post_reset
+----------
+
+int (*post_reset)(struct usb_interface *intf);
+
+The reset has completed.  Restore any saved device state and begin
+using the device again.
+
+If you need to allocate memory here, use GFP_NOIO or GFP_ATOMIC, if you
+are in atomic context.
+
+Call sequences
+==============
+
+No callbacks other than probe will be invoked for an interface
+that isn't bound to your driver.
+
+Probe will never be called for an interface bound to a driver.
+Hence following a successful probe, disconnect will be called
+before there is another probe for the same interface.
+
+Once your driver is bound to an interface, disconnect can be
+called at any time except in between pre_reset and post_reset.
+pre_reset is always followed by post_reset, even if the reset
+failed or the device has been unplugged.
+
+suspend is always followed by one of: resume, reset_resume, or
+disconnect.

Documentation/usb/persist.txt

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 		   Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
 
-		 September 2, 2006 (Updated May 29, 2007)
+		September 2, 2006 (Updated February 25, 2008)
 
 
 	What is the problem?
@@ -65,9 +65,10 @@ much better.)
 
 	What is the solution?
 
-Setting CONFIG_USB_PERSIST will cause the kernel to work around these
-issues.  It enables a mode in which the core USB device data
-structures are allowed to persist across a power-session disruption.
+The kernel includes a feature called USB-persist.  It tries to work
+around these issues by allowing the core USB device data structures to
+persist across a power-session disruption.
+
 It works like this.  If the kernel sees that a USB host controller is
 not in the expected state during resume (i.e., if the controller was
 reset or otherwise had lost power) then it applies a persistence check
@@ -80,28 +81,30 @@ re-enumeration shows that the device now attached to that port has the
 same descriptors as before, including the Vendor and Product IDs, then
 the kernel continues to use the same device structure.  In effect, the
 kernel treats the device as though it had merely been reset instead of
-unplugged.
+unplugged.  The same thing happens if the host controller is in the
+expected state but a USB device was unplugged and then replugged.
 
 If no device is now attached to the port, or if the descriptors are
 different from what the kernel remembers, then the treatment is what
 you would expect.  The kernel destroys the old device structure and
 behaves as though the old device had been unplugged and a new device
-plugged in, just as it would without the CONFIG_USB_PERSIST option.
+plugged in.
 
 The end result is that the USB device remains available and usable.
 Filesystem mounts and memory mappings are unaffected, and the world is
 now a good and happy place.
 
-Note that even when CONFIG_USB_PERSIST is set, the "persist" feature
-will be applied only to those devices for which it is enabled.  You
-can enable the feature by doing (as root):
+Note that the "USB-persist" feature will be applied only to those
+devices for which it is enabled.  You can enable the feature by doing
+(as root):
 
 	echo 1 >/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/persist
 
 where the "..." should be filled in the with the device's ID.  Disable
 the feature by writing 0 instead of 1.  For hubs the feature is
-automatically and permanently enabled, so you only have to worry about
-setting it for devices where it really matters.
+automatically and permanently enabled and the power/persist file
+doesn't even exist, so you only have to worry about setting it for
+devices where it really matters.
 
 
 	Is this the best solution?
@@ -112,19 +115,19 @@ centralized Logical Volume Manager.  Such a solution would allow you
 to plug in a USB flash device, create a persistent volume associated
 with it, unplug the flash device, plug it back in later, and still
 have the same persistent volume associated with the device.  As such
-it would be more far-reaching than CONFIG_USB_PERSIST.
+it would be more far-reaching than USB-persist.
 
 On the other hand, writing a persistent volume manager would be a big
 job and using it would require significant input from the user.  This
 solution is much quicker and easier -- and it exists now, a giant
 point in its favor!
 
-Furthermore, the USB_PERSIST option applies to _all_ USB devices, not
+Furthermore, the USB-persist feature applies to _all_ USB devices, not
 just mass-storage devices.  It might turn out to be equally useful for
 other device types, such as network interfaces.
 
 
-	WARNING: Using CONFIG_USB_PERSIST can be dangerous!!
+	WARNING: USB-persist can be dangerous!!
 
 When recovering an interrupted power session the kernel does its best
 to make sure the USB device hasn't been changed; that is, the same
@@ -133,10 +136,10 @@ aren't guaranteed to be 100% accurate.
 
 If you replace one USB device with another of the same type (same
 manufacturer, same IDs, and so on) there's an excellent chance the
-kernel won't detect the change.  Serial numbers and other strings are
-not compared.  In many cases it wouldn't help if they were, because
-manufacturers frequently omit serial numbers entirely in their
-devices.
+kernel won't detect the change.  The serial number string and other
+descriptors are compared with the kernel's stored values, but this
+might not help since manufacturers frequently omit serial numbers
+entirely in their devices.
 
 Furthermore it's quite possible to leave a USB device exactly the same
 while changing its media.  If you replace the flash memory card in a
@@ -152,5 +155,5 @@ but yourself.
 YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED!  USE AT YOUR OWN RISK!
 
 That having been said, most of the time there shouldn't be any trouble
-at all.  The "persist" feature can be extremely useful.  Make the most
-of it.
+at all.  The USB-persist feature can be extremely useful.  Make the
+most of it.

Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt

@@ -192,12 +192,9 @@ Keyspan USA-series Serial Adapters
 
 FTDI Single Port Serial Driver
 
-  This is a single port DB-25 serial adapter. More information about this
-  device and the Linux driver can be found at:
-	http://reality.sgi.com/bryder_wellington/ftdi_sio/
+  This is a single port DB-25 serial adapter.
 
-  For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Bill Ryder
-  at bryder@sgi.com
+  For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Bill Ryder.
 
 
 ZyXEL omni.net lcd plus ISDN TA

Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828

@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+  0 -> Unknown board                            (au0828)
+  1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q                        (au0828)        [2040:7200]
+  2 -> Hauppauge HVR850                         (au0828)        [2040:7240]
+  3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB                     (au0828)        [0fe9:d620]

Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv

@@ -148,3 +148,5 @@
 147 -> VoodooTV 200 (USA)                                  [121a:3000]
 148 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 2                                  [dbc0:d200]
 149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684)
+150 -> Geovision GV-600                                    [008a:763c]
+151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C

Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885

@@ -5,3 +5,6 @@
   4 -> DViCO FusionHDTV5 Express                           [18ac:d500]
   5 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1500Q                            [0070:7790,0070:7797]
   6 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1500                             [0070:7710,0070:7717]
+  7 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1200                             [0070:71d1]
+  8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700                             [0070:8101]
+  9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400                             [0070:8010]